158
A t 4 till lhuIllflllflhll fill] Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 1 of 158

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

A t

4

till lhuIllflllflhll fill]

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 1 of 158

ELECTRIC

BRISBANE CITY COUNCIL

LEWORTHY STREET WATER PUMP STATION WP22

CONTRACT BW.10-03/04

Job Number JO 7104

MAIN SWITCHBOARD

OPERATIONS and MAINTENANCE MANUAL

MANUFACTURED BY

SJ Electric (Qld) 19 Elliot Street Albion Qld. 4010

Telephone 07 3256 1522 Fax 07 3256 1533

Completed 30-June-2004

CONETACT YOUR NEAREST BRANCH PHONE 300 720 ®Pe SJ ELECTRIC (VIC) PTY LTD

A.B.N. 82 074 448 481 R.E.C. 13700

SJ ELECTRIC (OLD) PTY LTD A.B.N. 22 573 962 619 R.E.C. 7623

SJ ELECTRIC (NSW) PTY LTD A.B.N. 68 537 948 401 R.E.C. 23788C

SJ ELECTRIC (WA) PTY LTD A.B.N. 47 078 494 738 R.E.C. EC006006

MELBOURNE BRISBANE SYDNEY PERTH

Ank 76 Commercial Drive,

Thomastown Vic 3074

19 Elliot Street,

Albion Old 4010

25 Lidco Street,

Arndell Park NSW 2148

226 Planet Street,

Carlisle WA 6101

Phone: (03) 9466 3977 Phone: (07) 3256 1522 Phone: (02) 9672 7922 Phone: (08) 9470 4292

Fax: (03) 9466 4752 Fax: (07) 3256 1533 Fax 9672 7252 Fax: (08) 9470 4787

Email: [email protected] Email: [email protected] Email: graemec©sjelectricnsw.com.au Email: [email protected]

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS, CONTRACTORS & SWITCHBOARD MANUFACTURERS OAST - 02AV - ISSUE No 3

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 2 of 158

INDEX

SECTION 1. GENERAL

1.1 General Workplace Health & Safety 1.2 Project Overview 1.3 Plant Maintenance 1.4 Electrical Control System 1.5 Control & Monitoring System

2. MANUFACTURER'S TECHNICAL DATA 2.1 Merlin Gerin - NS Series Circuit Breakers. 2.2 Merlin Gerin - Multi 9 Circuit breaker. 2.3 Crompton - Phase failure Relay 2.4 Crompton - Current Transducer 2.5 Critec - Surge Divertor 2.6 Kraus & Namer - Control Selector Switches 2.7 Telemecanique - Z:13 Series Pushbuttons, indicators & controls 2.8 Telemecanique - Contactors LCF 2.9 Izumi - Control Relays + Bases 2.10 Emotron - Soft Starters 2.11 Emotron - Modbus Interface

3. DRAWINGS 3.1 Drawing Register 3.2 General Arrangement Drawings 3.3 Equipment Schedule

4. INSPECTION & TEST RESULTS

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 3 of 158

Page 1

General Workplace Health and Safety

The Workplace Health and Safety Act (1995) sets out the laws about

Workplace Health and Safety for all workplaces, workplace activities and

specified high-risk plant. The Electrical Safety Act (2002) sets out the

laws covering electrical safety. Nothing in this document is designed, in

any way, to undermine the authority of the Acts.

All reasonable care must always be taken to ensure the plant is without

risk to the health and safety of personnel operating and maintaining plant

and equipment.

Employers have an obligation to ensure the workplace health and safety

of all personnel at work.

It is employer responsibility to ensure that all persons entering or working

on the premises use appropriate personal protective equipment.

Personal protective equipment includes gloves, safety glasses, hard hats,

ear protection, safe foot ware and, where necessary, specialist protective

clothing for hazardous areas.

Any item of equipment should always be isolated before maintenance or

repairs commence to ensure that inadvertent operation of the item does

not result in risk to the health and safety of any person.

Where the item is isolated, any total or partial shutdown should not allow

a hazardous situation to be created.

Where the item cannot be isolated, another person should be stationed at

the controls of the item and an effective means of direct communication

should exist between the persons carrying out the maintenance and the

person at the controls.

General Operating Principles

All persons working the premises must be qualified Electrical Engineers

or electrical trades persons capable of performing the required tasks

competently. All personnel must also be familiar with plant and

equipment.

Adequate information, instruction, training and supervision must be

provided to enable personnel to perform work without risk to health and

safety.

Work in an orderly way.

FAJob Drawings And Documents\07104 Leworthy Street Psn\Manuals\Leworthy Street General.doc

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 4 of 158

Page 2

Plan work in advance to avoid hazardous situations.

Warn others of any hazards.

Make inquiries before starting work, particularly on any unfamiliar

installation or equipment.

Before any work begins ensure that any instructions received or given are

fully understood.

Concentrate on the task on hand.

Do not distract others or allow yourself to be distracted by foolish actions.

Work from a safe and convenient position that provides a maximum

working space that you do not have to over reach, you cannot slip, trip or

stumble and so endanger yourself and others.

Keep the working area tidy and free of unwanted materials and

equipment.

Use insulated tools where possible.

Inspect tools and equipment regularly and ensure that any necessary

maintenance is carried out.

Keep yourself in good health.

Do not work if ill or over tired, to the extent that your concentration,

movement or alertness is affected. Illness or fatigue can endanger yourself

and others.

F:\Job Drawings And Documents\07104 Leworthy Street Psn\Manuals\Leworthy Street General.doc

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 5 of 158

Page 3

Project Overview

Contract BW .10-03/04 was for the Design, manufacture, installation and

testing of a new Main switchboard for the Leworthy Street Water Pump

Station WP 22 located in Brisbane.

Equipment provided by SJ Electric ensures safe and efficient operation of the

Inlet Works. Equipment supplied and installed by SJ Electric includes: -

Switchboard;

Generator Terminal Box

The switchboard incorporates the latest technology in motor control, power

monitoring, and instrumentation. It is important engineers; technicians and

operators are familiar with the equipment installed before attempting any

adjustments, modifications or maintenance.

The following Sections of this manual contain a comprehensive description of

all equipment supplied, by SJ Electric. It is recommended that this manual be

referred to before carrying out any work on any equipment.

F: \Job Drawings And Documents\07104 Leworthy Street Psn\Manuals\Leworthy Street General.doc

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 6 of 158

Page 4

Plant Maintenance

To ensure proper operation of the plant the following should be observed: -

The plant should be kept clean and tidy at all times. Not only is this of

aesthetic value, it extends equipment life.

Check that all plant and equipment is operating correctly. Correctly

operating equipment promotes overall plant efficiency.

All items and areas of equipment should be hosed down and cleaned

regularly.

WARNING

Avoid directly hosing any drive motor or electrical item.

All maintenance, service, modifications and significant deviations from

Normal operating conditions should be recorded in the Plant Service Log

After a month of operation, check the tension of all bolts associated with

the plant and thereafter periodically. Bolted connections on painted

surfaces can loosen due to thinning of the paint underneath the bolt head-

bearing surface. Motor mounting bolts and other bolted connections

subjected to vibration should be periodically checked for loosening.

WARNING

Before starting work on any item ensure that the power supply is

isolated, tagged off, and the item cannot be started.

The importance of preventative maintenance cannot be over-emphasized.

Regular maintenance and suitable care of the equipment will ensure a

long and reliable service life of the equipment.

Many stoppages can be avoided by following the recommended

maintenance procedures. Do not wait until you hear the grinding of

equipment that has broken down. If you see any item wearing down,

replace it, before it causes damage to other associated items.

Preventive Maintenance

FAJob Drawings And Documents\07104 Leworthy Street Psn\Manuals\Leworthy Street General.doc

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 7 of 158

Page 5

Maintenance procedures recommended to extend switchboard life are outlined

as follows: -

Switchboard exterior should be regularly wiped down with a solvent base

cleaner such as "Spray & Wipe". This will ensure longevity of the

powder- coated surface.

Accessible areas like distribution boards and motor starter panels should

be cleaned with a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and foreign matter.

Connections and efficient operation of circuit breakers, contactors and

isolators should be checked every 12 months - especially where connected

to busbars.

Busbar connections should be checked every 12 months.

Globes for indicator lights should be checked on a weekly basis with any

faulty lamps replaced.

Electrical Control System

General Description

Electrical control equipment for the installation is housed in the switchboard

located on the rear wall of the pump station.

Main Incomer

Generator Incomer

FA.Job Drawings And Documents\07104 Leworthy Street Psn\Manuals\Leworthy Street General.doc

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 8 of 158

Page 6

Distribution Section

Pump Control Cubicles

Common Control Cubicle.

The switchboard has been constructed of mild steel of a dead front

construction.

Control and Monitoring System.

The control and monitoring of the system is performed by the Brisbane Water

telemetry system and was not included in this contract.

FA.Job Drawings And Documents\07104 Leworthy Street Psn\Manuals\Leworthy Street General.doc

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 9 of 158

TECHNICAL DATA SHEET For

Leworthy Street Pump Station

Equipment Type:

Location:

Model Numbers:

Manufacturer:

Supplier:

Circuit Breaker

Main Incomer Pump Circuit Breakers

NS 400 & NS630

Merlin GerM

Schneider Electric. 30 Graystone Street TINGALPA QLD 4173

Ph: 07 3890 2112 Fx: 07 3890 2098

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 10 of 158

Compact: functions and characteristics

general characteristics

conformity with standards

C Gri

t

Standardised characteristics indicated on the rating plate Ui: rated insulation voltage Uimp: rated impulse withstand voltage Icu: ultimate breaking capacity, for various values of the rated operational voltage Ue cat: utilisation category lcw: short-time withstand current lcs: service breaking capacity In: rated current

suitable for isolation

Compact circuit breakers and auxiliaries comply with the following international recommendations:

IEC 947-1: general rules; IEC 947-2: circuit breakers; IEC 947-3: switches, disconnectors,

switch-disconnectors, etc; IEC 947-4: contactors and motors starters IEC 947-5.1 and following - control circuit

devices and switching elements; automatic control components. In that these recommendations are applied in most countries, Compact circuit breakers and auxiliaries comply with European (EN 60947-1 and EN 60947-2) and the corresponding national standards:

France NF; Germany VDE; U.K BS; Austrialia AS; Italy CEI.

They also comply with the specifications of the marine classification companies (Veritas, Lloyd's Register of Shipping, Det Norske Veritas, etc). Compact circuit breakers are also designed for the protection of machine tools in that they comply with French standard NF C 79-130 and with the recommendations issued by the CNOMO organisation. Concerning the United States UL, Canadian CSA, Mexican NOM and Japanese JIS standards, please consult us.

pollution degree Compact circuit breakers are certified for operation in pollution-degree III environments as defined by IEC standard 947 (industrial environments).

tropicalisation Compact and derived circuit breakers comply with NF C 63-100 standard level 2 conditions (95% relative humidity at 45°C or 80% at 55°C, hot and humid climate conditions). They also comply with the following standards:

IEC 68-2-30 damp heat; IEC 68-2-2 dry heat; IEC 68-2-11 salt spray; IEC 68-2-1 low temperatures.

environmental protection Compact circuit breakers take into account current concerns for environmental protection. Most components are recyclable and parts are marked as specified in applicable standards.

ambient temperature Compact circuit breakers can be used at

temperatures ranging from -25°C to 70°C. Above 40°C (or 65°C for circuit breakers used to protect motor feeders), always take into account the derating coefficients indicated in the documentation;

wherever possible the circuit breakers should be put into service at their normal ambient operating temperature, however this can be done at temperatures between -35°C and -25°C as long as this condition does not last for an extended period;

in their original pack, Compact circuit breakers may be stored at temperatures ranging from -50° to +85°C.

discrimination eIn most cases, discrimination is total between two Compact NS circuit breakers equipped with standard trip units (or between Compact NS and Multi 9 circuit breakers). The table opposite indicates the combinations providing total discrimination for N-type circuit breakers equipped with standard trip units.

D 2( \ I

Pa e,s ^ , tin , A downstream circuit breaker rating (A)

NS 160 2 1

25° 250

4 ' 0

630 6 0:

..-

multi 9 C6ON 10...25 32...40 63

Compact NS8OH 2.5...6.3 12.5

25...80 NS100N 16...100 NS160N 125...160 NS250N 200...250 e

total discrimination: only the circuit breaker immediately upstream from a fault trips.

14 Merlin Gerin

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 11 of 158

suitability for isolation positive contact indication

a

All Compact circuit breakers are suitable for isolation as defined in IEC standard 947-2:

the isolation position corresponds to the 0 (OFF position);

the operating handle cannot indicate the "off " position unless the contacts are effectively open;

padlocks may not be installed unless the contacts are open. Installation of a rotary handle or a motor mechanism does not alter the reliability the position indication system.

The isolation function is certified by tests guaranteeing:

the mechanical reliability of the position indication system;

the absence of leakage currents; overvoltage withstand capacity between

upstream and downstream connections.

installation in class II switchboards All Compact circuit breakers, even when fitted with a rotary handle or a motor mechanism, may be installed through the door of class II switchboards (as per IEC standard 664).

Installation requires no special operations because the Compact provides class II

insulation between the front face and all internal circuits.

degree of protection (as per standards IEC 529)

rsistrmlbrealcertwitti tenninalashilas

0

with to le "kb ---,-101;

11 100 0

kr...

with direct rotary handle standard / VDE IP40

...,,,spued. in sWitaboard with toggle IP 40

with direct rotary handle standard / VDE MCC CNOMO

IP40 IP43 1P54

01"'"

II

with extended rotary handle

..,

vd

P55

with motor mechanism IP40

Merlin Gerin 15

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 12 of 158

Compact: functions and characteristics

protection of low-voltage distribution networks (cont.)

circuit breakers for power distribution switchboards

Compact NS250H

a a a

Compact NS630L

(*) 2P only for N-types

(' for operational voltage up to 500 V

,Cornpact:cif óuittikis. number of poles

electrical ;charictenstics'as rated current (A) In 40°C rated insulation voltage (V) Ui rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz

DC

ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms)

lcu AC 50/60 Hz 220/240 V

380/415 V 440 V

500 V

DC

525 V

660/690 V

250 V (1 P)

500 V (2 P in series) service breaking capacity utilisation category suitability for isolation endurance (C-0 cycles)

lcs (% Icu)

mechanical electrical 440 V- In/2

440 V- In

ectrical chaiicWtia, as pgs staudard ktnia breaking capacity (kA) 240 V

480 V

600 V

REOPS11011 cLee following protection against overcurrents (A)

interchangeable tnp units Ir setting current

earth fault protection add-on Vigi module Vigirex relay

.nstaflatiOnian&ConneCtiorfoi-/',- fixed/front connection fixed/rear connection plug-in (on base) withdrawable (on chassis)

LnlcatLoid measuemnt auahis auxiliary switches electronic trip unit related functions voltage presence indicator current transformer module ammeter module insulation monitoring module

r-FICLIOAL. 1 e s auxiliary releases motor mechanism rotary handles (direct, extended) manual/automatic source changeover systems

rnstalliti dna conife7rtitto accesoiies bare cable connectors terminal extensions and spreaders terminal shields and phase barriers escutcheons

CliKelisioreind welrfcr, dimensions LxHxD(mm)

j- 4";',',;

2/3 poles, fixed, FC

4 poles, fixed, FC weight (kg) 3 poles, fixed, FC

4 poles, fixed, FC

16 Merlin Garin

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 13 of 158

1 _

$16 g24 ,,.- 0 .; ' NS400 -

$03- 2 () , 3, 4

100

2 (1, 2 (*), 3, 4 3, 4 3 4 3 4

'IZig 250 160 400 630

750 750 750 750 750 8 8 8 8 8 690 690 690 690 690 500

85 100

500 500

N

85 100 150

500

85 100 150

500

N

100 150 150

N

85 H

100 150 85 25 70 150 36 70 150 36 70 150 45 70 150 45 70 150 25 65 130 35 65 130 35 65 130 42 65 130 42 65 130 18 50 100 30 50 70 30 50 70 30 50 100 30 50 70 18 35 100 22 35 50 22 35 50 22 35 100 22 35 50 8 10 75 8 10 20 8 10 20 10 20 75 10 20 35

, 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100 85 85 50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100 85 85 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%** 100%** 100%** A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A

a a s a is 50000 40000 20000 15000 15000 50000 40000 20000 12000 8000 30000 20000 10000 6000 4000

85 200 85 100 200 85 100 200 100 85 100 200 85 100 200 25 65 130 35 65 130 35 65 130 42 65 130 42 65 130 10 35 50 20 35 50 20 35 50 20 35 50 20 35 50

gg:

12.5...100 12.5...160 12.5...250 160...400 250...630

a s ill a

m

w e a N

is a a w a

a a a

A '

a a

a a

. r 2

105 x 161 x 86 105 x 161 x 86 105 x 161 x 86 140x 255x 110 140 x 255 x110 140 x 161 x 86 140 x 161 x 86 140 x 161 x 86 185 x 255 x 110 185 x 255 x110 1.6 1.6 1.9 6.0 6.0 2.1 2.1 2.3 7.8 7.8

Merlin Gerin 17

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 14 of 158

Compact: functions and characteristics

protection of LV distribution networks trip units for Compact NS400 and NS630

for AC networks, Compact NS400 and NS630 circuit breakers can be equipped with electronic trip units STR23SE or STR53UE. 4 circuit breaker ratings are available:

NS400: 150, 250 and 400 A, NS630: 630 A: for DC networks, the Compact NS400/630

are equipped with MP trip units (magnetic, non interchangeable).

current setting (A) 60 150

IRstandard protection with discrimination

250 400 500 630

- ":44,7tiPaNWI: 4V4,14

elprotection for protection for DC generator-supplied networks networks, protection for long cable runs

Trip units STR23SE and STR53UE Protection for all types of loads, from 60 to 630 A, is possible with only two catalogue numbers:

trip units STR23SE and STR53UE can be mounted on all Compact NS400 and NS630, types N, H or L. Trip unit STR53UE offers a greater number of protection settings and optional indication, measurement and communication functions;

trip units do not have a predefined rating. The tripping threshold depends only on the circuit breaker rating and the long time protection setting.

For example, trip unit STR23SE with maximum settings, has a tripping threshold of:

250 A, if mounted on a Compact NS400 - 250 A rating, o 630 A, if mounted on a Compact NS630;

electronic trip units adapt to both 3P and 4P circuit breakers. 4P circuit breakers are equipped as standard with a sealable three- position neutral protection setting: 3d (neutral unprotected), 4d (neutral protection at Ir), 3d + N/2 (neutral protection at 0.5 times Ir) where Ir is the trip unit current setting.

ORIL(nit;f0'1*-4 Co 400 and IN S6 rating (A) In 20 to 70"C 150 150 400 630 150 ZOO 400 ti:su for circuit breaker Compact NS400 N/H/L

Compact NS630 N/H/L

overloacEprot ction,(Iong ti tripping Ir 20 to 70°C (*) threshold (A)

e ,, l''

adjustable (48 settings) 0.4...1 x In

adjustable (48 settings) 0.4...1 x In

adjustable neutral 4P 3d no protection no protection (protection 4P 4d 1 x 1r 1 x 1r

4P 3d + N/2 0.5 x Ir 0.5 x Ir tripping time (s) fixed adjustable (min...max) at 1.5 x Ir 90...180 17...25 34...50 69...100 138...200 277...400

at 6 x Ir 5...7.5 0.4...0.5 1.6...2 3.2...4 6.4...8 12.8...16 at 7.2 Ir 3.2...5.0 0.5...0.7

- ',,, &

adjustable (8 1.5...10 x Ir

1.1...1.4

, ' . 4464.- settings)

2.2...2.8

e

4.4...5.5 ., .,.

8 8 11

/ 110 =circui protegtion, shorttme . ..,

tripping Im or lsd threshold (A)

adjustable settings) 2...10 x Ir

accuracy ± 15% ± 15% time delay (ms) max. overcurrent

time before tripping fixed 4 40

adjustable (4 settings + constant "12t = function") 4 15 < 60 < 140 < 230

total breaking time < 60 < 60 < 140 < 230 < 350

rticiredi instant

indication of type of fault zone selective interlocking (ZSI) communication (COM) built-in ammeter I

adjustable (8 settings) 1.5...11 x In

(standard)

"earth-fault" protection (1) ( If the STR23SE/STR53UE, are used at high operating temperature, the setting must take into account the thermal limits of the circuit breaker; the overload protection setting cannot exceed 0.95 at 60°C and 0.90 at 70°C for the Compact NS400, and 0.95 at 50°C, 0.90 at 60°C and 0.85 at 70°C for the Compact NS630.

26 Merlin Germ

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 15 of 158

electronic trip unit STR23SE

a

protection LT (long time) overload protection, adjustable threshold, based on the actual rms current as defined by IEC 947-2, appendix F:

o adjustable threshold (1) using six lo base settings (0.5 to 1) and fine adjustment Ir with eight settings ranging from (0.8 to 1),

non-adjustable tripping time (2);

ST (short-time) short-circuit protection: adjustable threshold 1m (3), fixed time delay (4), with or without

constant 12t function; I (instantaneous) short-circuit protection,

fixed threshold (5).

other functions

setting example

Indications Load indication (LED) in front (7):

goes on at: 90 % of Ir threshold; flashes at: >105 % or more of Ir threshold.

4,47 Jo I

sam P n nu 4th5tittin"

vong,tripping,thTshold, rpxlo, Ir - 630--N,Ol5 (3 x-0.'=,-2501A,

3'!4.'"f ' ag ;*

Test Test connector in front (8), for connection to a mini test kit or calibration test kit (see page 73) to check circuit breaker operation after fitting the trip unit or other accessories.

lo .8 .9

.7 1

63

5

x In

40 ketx0:8 7160 A

Ir .9 .93

88 _.95 .85 .98

.8 1

x to

Merlin Germ 27

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 16 of 158

Compact: functions and characteristics

auxiliaries

auxiliary switches

for Compact Compact NS100 to NS630

for Compact c801 to C1251

Changeover contact Auxiliary switches remote the circuit breaker operating status and can thus be used for indications, electrical locking, relays, etc.

Functions OF (open/closed): indicates the position of

the circuit breaker contacts; SD (trip indication): indicates that the

circuit breaker has tripped due to: Dan overload, o a short-circuit, Dan earth fault, o the operation of a voltage release or of the "push-to-trip" button, the operation of plug-in base or chassis when breaker is on. Resets when the circuit breaker is reset;

SDE (fault indication): indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to an overload, a short-circuit or an earth fault. Resets when the circuit breaker is reset;

SDV (Vigi fault indication): indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to an earth fault. Resets when the Vigi module is reset;

CAM (early-make or early-break function): indicates the position of the rotary handle. Used in particular for advanced-opening safety trip devices;

connected/disconnected: indicates the position of a withdrawable breaker.

Electrical characteristics for Compact NS100 to NS630

switching of very low loads: All the above auxiliary switches are also available in "low-lever versions capable of switching very low loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic circuits).

Standards Auxiliary switches comply with IEC 947-5.

Installation functions OF, SD, SDE and SDV:

o the switches clip into slots behind the front of the circuit breaker (or the Vigi module for the SDV function); ofor Compact NS80...630, one model serves for all indication functions depending on where it is fitted in the circuit breaker. The SDE function on a circuit breaker equipped with a thermal-magnetic trip unit requires the SDE actuator;

CAM: to be fitted in the rotary handle module. Depending on how it is installed, it ensures either the CAO (early-break) or the CAF (early-make) function;

"connected/disconnected" function: 2 parts to be fitted on the chassis and the withdrawable circuit breaker.

Communication Auxiliary switches for Compact NS are also available in communicating version and can be installed in place of the standard switches (see Digipact catalogue).

Connection See page 68.

conventional switches "low-level" switches rated thermal current (A) 6 5 minimum load 10 mA with 24 V 1 mA with V

AC15 DC AC

AC15 bC

,

1--,:- DC12 DC14

AC : utilisation category (IEC 947-5-1) AC12 AC12 DC12 DC14 operational current (A) 24 V 6 6 2.5 1 5 3 5 1

48 V 6 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2 110 V 6 5 0.8 0.05 5

.-5

2.5 0.8 0.05 220/240 V 6 4 2 250 V 0.3 0.03 0.3 0.03 380/415 V 6 3 5 1.5 440 V 6 3 5 1.5 660/690 V 6 0.1

Electrical characteristics for Compact C801 to C1251 rated thermal current (A)

n on

operational current (A) AC

2

connec disconnected 5 220 V

380 V

DC 24 V

48 V

110V 220 V

1.4 1.4 1.4

2.8 2 2.8 2

1 1

0.3 1

0.1 0.15 0.1 0.15

64 Merlin Coin

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 17 of 158

voltage releases

for Compact NS100 to NS630

MIL

an

for Compact C801 to C1251

A voltage release can be used to trip the circuit breaker via a control signal.

Undervoltage release (MN) trips the circuit breaker when the control

voltage drops below a tripping threshold; tripping threshold between 0.35 and

0.7 times the rated voltage; circuit breaker closing is possible only if

the voltage exceeds 0.85 times the rated voltage. Circuit breaker tripping by an MN release meets the requirements of IEC 947-2 standard.

Time-delay unit for an MN release Eliminates nuisance trippings due to voltage dips 200 ms

used in conjunction: o with a 250 V DC MN release, control voltage: 220/240 V AC,

with a 48 V DC MN release, control voltage: 48 V AC.

Electrical characteristics

Shunt release (MX) Trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage rises above 0.7 x Un. Impulse type 20ms or maintained control signals.

Operation when the circuit breaker has been tripped

by a release (MN or MX), it must be reset either locally or by remote control;

MN or MX tripping has priority over manual (or motor mechanism) closing. In the presence of a standing trip order, such on action does not result in any closing, even temporary, of the main contacts;

endurance: 50% of the rated mechanical endurance of

the circuit breaker for Compact NS100...630,

1000 cycles for Compact C801...1251. Installation and connection

the releases snap in behind the front cover;

connection using wires with a CSA of up to 1.5 mm2, to integrated terminals blocks.

or Compact NSIOOato 0 rg80'J t.01205 ., ,,, Wig

< 10 VA

DDINS4 acip-;a. < 150 VA

lot < 150 W consumption pick-up (MX) <10 W

seal-in (MN, MNR) < 5 VA < 5 W < 8 VA < 5 W response time (ms) < 50 < 50 < 50 < 50

Merlin Gerin 65

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 18 of 158

TECHNICAL DATA SHEET

For

Leworthy Street Pump Station

Equipment Type: Phase Failure Relay

Location: Common Control

Model Numbers: 252-PSGW

Manufacturer: Crompton

Supplier: Alstrom. 3/7 Miller Street Murrarie QLD 4172

Ph: 07 3890 4412 Fx: 07 3890 4413

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 19 of 158

- I

Application:

el Portable pumps

Portable compressors

Eg Motor driven mixing equipment

Motors - Single Phasing

Gensets - correct engine rotation

All portable equipment

Ei All rotating machines

We also manufacture front of panel mounting phase sequence indicators

Protector Trip Relays 250 Series DIN Rail and Wall Mounted - Phase Sequence and Phase Failure

(ar;;-(,-

14 11 12 PROTECTOR

1124

216-'4"*29 014 Y.

Introduction

The Crompton phase sequence and phase failure protector relays are designed to monitor the correct phase rotation or sequence of three phase, 3 or 4 wire, supply systems for protection against incorrect phase sequence, loss of one phase and under voltage.

Rotating machines are particularly vulnerable to incorrect phase sequence. Three phase motors can rotate in the wrong direction, potentially leading to physical damage or the risk of injury to personnel, yet voltage and current readings may appear normal. If one phase is lost because of a blown fuse, electric motors can continue to operate (single phasing) which can result in severe electrical or mechanical damage.

Product Function

For permanent installations, this relay should be used to monitor the incoming supply, protecting all equipment against incorrect connection at initial installation or after maintenance work. Rotating machines that cannot tolerate reverse rotation or pose significant risk to personnel under this condition should be individually protected with this relay. The possibility of incorrect supply connection is much more likely in portable equipment or marine applications

The protector continuously monitors the three phase supply. With the correct phase sequence applied, the front panel LED will illuminate and the output relay will be energized. An incorrect sequence or missing phase will de-energize the relay, and the LED will be extinguished. If the supply drops below 85% of its nominal voltage, this condition will also cause a trip.

Protection against

Incorrect phase sequence

Loss of one phase

Under voltage

Important note: If one phase is lost due to a blown fuse, some loads can re-generate the missing voltage. This relay can be used as a phase failure relay providing the regenerated voltage in the open phase is less than 70% of the nominal supply voltage. If there is the possibility of a higher regenerated voltage, the phase balance relay 252-PSF should be used.

Protection for

Portable electrical equipment

Incorrect sequence connection

Loss of one phase (which can result in severe electrical/ mechanical damage or physical/personnel damage due to reverse rotation of motor driven equipment)

Web: www.crompton-instruments.com Email: crompton.infoalltycoelectronics.eom 2002

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 20 of 158

I I

-ompton 137-712111

1 Protector Relays

aa,

Protector Trip Relays 250 Series DIN Rail and Wall Mounted - Phase Sequence and Phase Failure

Specification

Approvals: U.L recognized up to 300V Overload: 1.2 x continuously CSA Approved up to 240V 1.5 x for 10 x 10 seconds to

Nominal Voltage: 100, 110, 120, 208, 220, Symmetric

230, 240, 277, 380, 400, Undenroltage Protection: 415, 440 & 480V Preset at 85% of nominal

System Frequency: 50, 60, or 400Hz (specify) Weight: Approximately 0.4kg

Burden: 3VA approx.

Product Code Examples

Relay

3 Phase 3 or 4 wire

3 Phase 3 or 4 wire

FREirpu5.7771 120Vi aktOlie,

%att. 16V Q.:60 tlz:'

Connection Diagrams

Protection igAissrpaziii Catalogue No.

Phase sequence, under voltage

Phase sequence, under voltage

252-PVRU-PQBX-C6

252-PVRU-S8BX-C6

252-PVR Relay

Contact Set 1 Contact Set 2

14 11 12 22 21 24 PROTECTOS1

L1 : 24 21,.22 11*.,4;:: +ED

L3 L2

L1 L2 L3

Input

Note: No neutral connection is required

Web: www.crompton-instruments.com Email: crompton.inlotttycoelectronics.com 2002

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 21 of 158

TECHNICAL DATA SHEET

For

Leworthy Street Pump Station

Equipment Type: Circuit Breaker

Location: Switchboard Distribution Chassis

Model Numbers: Multi 9

Manufacturer: Merlin Gerin

Supplier: Schneider Electric. 30 Graystone Street TINGALPA QLD 4173

Ph: 07 3890 2112 Fx: 07 3890 2098

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 22 of 158

circuit protection C6ON circuit-breakers circuit-breakers up to 63 A B and C curves

IEC 898: 6000 Al, IEC 947-2: 10 kA

functions The circuit-breakers combine the following functions: - protection of circuits against short-circuit currents, - protection of circuits against overload currents, - control,

- isolation, - protection of persons against indirect contact in TN and IT earthing systems.

C6ON circuit-breakers are used in the tertiary sector and industry.

description

catalogue numbers

24057

technical data common to C6ON circuit- breakers b power circuit v voltage rating: 440 V CA v breaking capacity according to IEC 947-2, lou ultimate breaking capacity (0-CO cycle) : Lratiriok ,type 'GT( '677- 43real" cad

sicri

0.5...63 1 P 230...240 10 400...415 3 (1)

P + N, 2P, 3P, 4P 230...240 20 2P, 3P, 4P 400...415 10

(1) breaking capacity under 1 pole in an IT insulated earthing system (case of the double fault). y limitation class (IEC 898): 3 v number of cycles (0-C): 20 000 b environment v tropicalisation: treatment 2 (relative humidity: 95 % at 55 °C) v connection: tunnel terminals for the following cables: - 16 mm2 flexible or 25 mm2 rigid up to rating 25 A - 25 mm2 flexible or 35 mm2 rigid for 32 to 63 A ratings.

B curve use when there are weak short-circuit currents (generators, long cables). technical data b power circuit: v ratings: 6 to 63 A set at 30 °C v tripping curve: the magnetic trip units operate between 3 and 5 In v breaking capacity according to IEC 898, 101 ultimate breaking capacity (0-CO cycle) :

tatiAg- "type : breakig CIO b-att9cny

etilAJA

10...63 1P 230...400 6 000 1P + N 230 6 000 2P, 3P, 4P 400 6 000

y limitation class (IEC 898): 3

C curve use cables feeding conventional loads. technical data b power circuit v ratings: 0.5 to 63 A set at 30 °C v tripping curve: the magnetic trip units operate between 5 and 10 In v breaking capacity according to IEC 898, Icri ultimate breaking capacity (0-CO cycle) rating; - v !MAIM (A)

148'n A

0.5...63 1P 230...400 6 000 1P + N 230 6 000 2P, 3P, 4P 400 6 000

v limitation class (IEC 898): 3

C6ON B curve

1P 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

24049 2 12 24050 2 12 24051 2 12 24052 2 12 24053 2 12 24054 2 12 24055 2 12 24056 2 12 24057 2 12

90062E.fm/2 Merlin Gerin Updated: 4/07/01 Schneider Electric

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 23 of 158

circuit protection C6ON circuit-breakers circuit-breakers up to 63 A B and C curves

IEC 898: 6000 Al, IEC 947-2: 10 kA

catalogue numbers

40

24083

24094

24107

24248

24262

catakig nan rnocChpeitla

C6ON B curve (continued

2P 1 3

2 4

3P 1 3 5

* *

2 4 6

4P 1 3 5 7 * * * *

2 4 6 8

C6ON C curve

1P 1

*

2

Schneider Electric W Merlin Gerin

6 24075 4 6 10 24076 4 6 16 24077 4 6 20 24078 4 6 25 24079 4 6 32 24080 4 6 40 24081 4 6 50 24082 4 6 63 24083 4 6

6 24088 6 4 10 24089 6 4 16 24090 6 4 20 24091 6 4 25 24092 6 4 32 24093 6 4 40 24094 6 4 50 24095 6 4 63 24096 6 4

6 24101 8 3 10 24102 8 3 16 24103 8 3 20 24104 8 3 25 24105 8 3 32 24106 8 3 40 24107 8 3 50 24108 8 3 63 24109 8 3

0,5 24067 2 12 1 24235 2 12 2 24236 2 12 3 24237 2 12 4 24238 2 12 6 24239 2 12 10 24240 2 12 16 24242 2 12 20 24243 2 12 25 24244 2 12 32 24245 2 12 40 24246 2 12 50 24247 2 12 63 24248 2 12

1 24249 4 6 2 24250 4 6 3 24251 4 6 4 24252 4 6 6 24253 4 6 10 24254 4 6 16 24256 4 6 20 24257 4 6 25 24258 4 6 32 24259 4 6 40 24260 4 6 50 24261 4 6 63 24262 4 6

Updated: 4/07/01 90062E f m/3

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 24 of 158

circuit protection C6ON circuit-breakers circuit-breakers up to 63 A B and C curves

IEC 898: 6000 IEC 947-2: 10 kA

catalogue numbers

24272

24285

24304

2P

2 4

0.5 1

2 3 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

24068 4 6 24263 4 6 24264 4 6 24265 4 6 24266 4 6 24267 4 6 24268 4 6 24270 4 6 24271 4 6 24272 4 6 24273 4 6 24274 4 6 24275 4 6 24276 4 6

3P 0.5 24069 6 4 1 3 5 1 24277 6 4 >k * * 2 24278 6 4

3 24279 6 4 4 24280 6 4 6 24281 6 4 10 24282 6 4

2 4 6 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

4P 0.5 1 3 5 7 1 * * * * 2

3 4

6 10

2 4 6 8 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

24284 6 4 24285 6 4 24286 6 4 24287 6 4 24288 6 4 24289 6 4 24290 6 4

24070 8 3 24291 8 3 24292 8 3 24293 8 3 24294 8 3 24295 8 3 24296 8 3 24298 8 3 24299 8 3 24300 8 3 24301 8 3 24302 8 3 24303 8 3 24304 8 3

additional information

Vigi modules: page 90115/2 electrical auxiliaries: page 9014212 accessories: page 91903/2 dimensions: page 90148/2

curves: page 90180/2

90062E frn/4 Merlin Gerin Updated: 4/07/01 Schneider Electric

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 25 of 158

TECHNICAL DATA SHEET

For

Leworthy Street Pump Station

Equipment Type: Current Transducer

Location: Pump Control

Model Numbers: D414-5A 24vdc

0 Manufacturer: Crompton

Supplier: Alstrom. 3/7 Miller Street Murrarie QLD 4172

Ph: 07 3890 4412 Fx: 07 3890 4413

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 26 of 158

-

riompton E=Es

rtan

Moulded Case Current Transformers 802 Series Instrument Transformers

Model 802-943

Specifications

Model 802-940

Application: Generally for Ammeter use only

Manufactured to meet the requirements of UL 1244 and revisions

Flexible leads are UL 1015 105C CSA Frequency: 50-400 Hz approved, #16 AWG, 24" long

Installation Class: 0.6 KV. BIL. 10 KV. full wave Non-standard lengh to be specifed

Terminals are brass studs No. 8-32 UNC with one flat washer, lockwasher and regular nut

UL Recognized

ABS Approved Dimensions (inches)

Ordering Information

Catalogue Number

U-NTLS

U-NWLS

U-PBLS

U-PDLS

U-PKLS

U-PBLS

U-PSLS

U-PZLS

U-RLLS

U-RSLS

U-RXLS

0.96

60:5; r5.5;', 80.5411,

r 1.2C5": * 1%

1%

+1%

+1% + 1%

+1%

0.40

0.41

0.42

0.43

0.43

0.44 0.44

0.45

0.48

0.51

9;FrAl.., 0.54

Other ratios available on request.

NOTE: When ordering, prefix Cat. No with model designation required. i.e. 802-943U-NTLS or 802-940U-NTLS

Web: www.crompton-instruments.com Email: crompton.intoetycoelectronics.com 2002

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 27 of 158

TECHNICAL DATA SHEET

For

Leworthy Street Pump Station

Equipment Type: Surge Diverter

Location: Main Incomer

Model Numbers: TDS-MT-277

Manufacturer: Critec

Supplier: Energy Correction Options P.O.Box 431 Kelvin Grove Q1d,4059 Te1:33560577 Fax:33561432

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 28 of 158

Detailed Specifications for ERICO's TDS-MOVTEC SURGE DIVERTER TDS-MT-277

Applications Lightning transients and surges are a major cause of expensive electronic equip- ment failure and business disruption. Damage may result in loss of computers, data and communications, loss of revenue, and loss of profits. The new TDS- MOVTEC family of surge diverters offer economical and reliable protection from power transients in even the most strenuous applications.

Transient Discriminating Technology (TDS) introduces the first quantum leap in transient suppression technology for mains powered equipment. It offers a new level of safety and reliability, yet retains optimum protection levels critical for electronic equipment. TDS is an active frequency based device that discriminates between the slower mains voltages and the higher speed transients. When transient frequencies are detected the patented TDS "Quick-Switch" technology "switches in" robust protection devices to limit the transient to safe levels. The frequency discrimination circuit controlling the TDS "Quick-Switch" ensures that the device is virtually immune to the effects of the 50/60Hz sustained over- voltages, allowing fault voltages of up to 480Vrms without degradation, and providing over-voltage robustness in excess of the demanding new and emerging standards.

TDS technology is essential for any site where abnormal over-voltages can occur or where the possible catastrophic failure of traditional technologies due to over- voltage events can not be tolerated.

Since 75% of all lightning strikes comprise multiple strokes through the one air to

ground channel, often as little as 30 milliseconds apart, conventional MOVs can rapidly accumulate heat and self destruct just when they are most needed. TDS- MOVTECs are high capacity surge diverters and are the most advanced surge protection devices currently in place to offer low let through levels at sites with poor voltage regulation. Internal electronics continuously monitor TDS- MOVTEC protection, and their status is displayed on a 5-segment LED bar graph. Alarm contacts are provided which may be used to shut down the system or activate an external warning if the internal surge material is below optimum condition.

Features Robust against abnormal over-voltage

UL1449 Edition 2 compliant (pending)

Single phase primary protection for extremly high exposure sites and point- of-entry protection applications

Single mode protection, configurable to Ph-N, Ph-E or N-E protection

Small foot print for more effective use of realestate.

Fail safe voltage free alarm contacts

5 segment electronic status indication ideal for poorly illuminated locations

Long Service life

Lug terminals for connection of large cables

CRDWELD® CRITEC® ERITECH® WELDED ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES LIGHTNING PROTECTION/GROUNDING CO®

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 29 of 158

TDS-MOVTEC SURGE DIVERTER TDS-MT-277

SPECIFICATIONS Operation: Nominal input voltage

Input frequency

Max. permissible abnormal over-voltage Power systems

Earth leakage current Protection:

Modes Let through voltage @ 3kA 8/20ps

Let through voltage @ 20IcA 8/201is Surge rating 8/20ps

Surge rating 10/350us Energy rating

Multipulsetm' capability Aggregate surge material Alarms and Indicators:

Protection status indication User configurable alarm contacts

Breakdown isolation MOVTEC alarm actuation point

Physicals: Operating conditions

Enclosure style Dimensions (W x D x H)

Weight

Encapsulation Enclosure material

Surface finish Wiring terminals

Warranty Test standards:

Approvals

Estimated Life of MOVTEC and TDS-MOVTEC

11A 10 100

Number of Impulses

I35kA tionec

1,000

TDS -Hoytec

Cat

Cat

Cat C

Cat 13

10,000

Surge rated to meet

220 -277 Vrms 50/60 Hz

480 Vrms TN-C, TN-S, TN-C-S (MEN), TT <2mA

Ph-N, Ph-E or N-E <740V

<970V 100kA 20kA 4800J Yes

200kA 8/20us

5-segment LED bar graph Voltage free relay contact (NO) 4kV

.60% status (two LEDs off)

-35 to +55°C, 0-90% humidity Proprietry 45 x 140 x 140mm

600g (approx.) Shockguard Flame Retardent UL94V-0 Highly Polished M6 Swift Thread and Bolt 5 years

UL1449 Edition 2 (pending) AS 3260, IEC 950 C-Tick Certificate of suitability, Electricity Regulator ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 Cat A, Cat B, Cat C. ANSI/IEEE C62.45-1987 Life cycle testing. AS/NZS 1768-1991 Cat A, Cat.B, Cat C. BS 6651:1992 Cat A, Cat B. IEC801-5 Installation Class 5.

IEC 61643-1

Note: Other operating voltages and frequencies are available on application. For specifications on other TDS products, refer to relevant Specifications Sheet. Exceeding nominal operating voltage while transient events occur may affect product life.

TDS, MULTIPULSE, PROLINE, CRITEC, MOVTEC, DINLINE and SURGE REDUCTION FILTER are trademarks of ERICO.

Due to a policy of continual product development, specifications are subject to change without notice. © Copyright 1998

Model Number

TDS-MT-277

Description

TDS MOVTEC 220-277V 100KA

Hobart Sydney Melbourne Canberra

ph:+61 3 6237-3200

ph:+61 2 9479-8500

ph:+61 3 9894-2677 ph:+61 2 6257-3055

fax+61 3 6273-0399 fax+61 2 9980-5092 fax+61 3 9894-3216 fax 2 6257-3127

Adelaide ph:+61 8 8366-6555 fax +61 8 8366-6556 Perth ph:+61 8 9358-1233 fax +61 8 9358-1404 Singapore ph:+ 65-763-2477 fax+ 65 763-2397 Thailand ph:+ 662 627-9037-8 fax+662 627-9168

enrcri e cn

ERICO's coordinated approach to facility protection - CADWELD, CRITEC, ERITECH www.erico.com

Co

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 30 of 158

TECHNICAL DATA SHEET

For

Leworthy Street Pump Station

Equipment Type: Control Selector Switches

Location: Common Control

Model Numbers: CAD12A222-600

Manufacturer: Kraus & Namer

Supplier: Australian Solenoids Pty Ltd 22 Brookes Street, Bowen Hills, Qld 4006 Phone (07) 3252 8344 Fax (07) 3252 1497

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 31 of 158

4) KRA US & NAIMER BLUE LINE SWITCHGEAR

www.krausnaimer.com (1) Catalog 100 CL Switches 10 A-20 A C, CA, CAD Switches 10 A-315 A L Switches 350 A-2400 A

K

____11111011

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 32 of 158

Switch Function and Configuration L Switches

Function/Type Escutch. Plate Handle Code Stages

Double Latching

Connection Diagram

L350 L351 L630 211E, L631 .I

Li000 cx RP (3 L1001 L1250 L1251

ON/OFF Switches with 90° Switching

1 pole L1600 2 pole 3 pole

e° -.127-

e... .,..7- :A296-:600, S2'94:), _*6,'

4 8 12

1 17

\I 4 xl

1 1 1 1-3 pole

16 32 48

° 0-6

.A292=606 ins 1 pole L2000 2 pole 9tiP ' '' 1C) 1 T

\ \ 1- and 2 pole

2640 1-

Double-throw Switches without OFF" 60° Switching

1 pole L350/L351 2 pole 3 pole 4 pole

V

1 pole L400 2 pole 3 pole 4 pole

1 pole L600 2 pole 3 pole 4 pole

1V=

V

V

1 2 4 5 7 8 10 11 y y y 3 9 12

1-4 pole

ar- A220' 3 e 2-4!6-50/ 6 fA-2:V-, 9

12 4'Ve.747,4

1 pole L630/L631 2 pole 3 pole

1 2

V

1 pole L800 2 pole 3 pole

* I 2

1 pole L1000/L1001 2 pole

1 pole L1200

1 pole L1250/L1251

V

1 7

V

1 pole L1600 *

V

1 pole L2000 1 2

V

Sf

-4;

25 27

1`1 lx 1`1

18

3 9 15 21 27 33 35 45

I 1 111

2 14 26 77

1-4 pole

1-4 pole

4 8 12

y

3 6 9

1-3 pole

4 8 12

1 9 17 25 33 41

1 I 16 32

1-3 pole

6 12 I\ 1

1 and 2 pole

1 13

24

8

10

121 18

Additional length for switches size S2 for mounting E/EF = 27 mm 26 Additional length for switches size S3 for mounting E/EF = 31,5 mm and mounting ERNE = 20,1 mm

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 33 of 158

Mounting C, CA, CAD, CL Switches

Single Hole Mounting Terminals rotated 90° -

Code CA4 CA4-1 CL4

CAD.. CA1 0- CA25 CL1O

With locking nut and shaft seal, protection IP 65

Without escutcheon plate

With square escutcheon plate

With rectangular escutcheon plate

`' 4" " " With size S1 escutcheon plate and heavy duty latching

Mounting key for locking nut

mm

FS1 16/22

FS1A/ 16/22 '

- -V

F,T3

32

FS2 16/22

S21 16/22

,e 4 4

16/22 16/22

mm

22 22 22/30 22/30

22 22 22/30 22/30

22 22

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 34 of 158

mm Dimensions inch

4111

Single Hole Mounting or Base Mounting

FS1... FH3...

FT1... FS2...

FT3... FT2...

FT4...

0

FS1...

FS2...

FS4...

A.

FH3...

FT1...

FT2...

FS4...

FT3...

FT4...

VE VE-V

A

B

C

CA10 CA11 CA10B CAD11 CA11B CAD1 2 CA20 CA252 CA20B 48 48 48 (64) 64 1.89 1.89 1.89 (2.52) 2.52

43 45 46 56 1.69 1.77 1.81 2.20

10,5 10,5 10,5 13,5 .41 .41 .41 .53

4,1 4,1 4,1 4,1 Di .16 .16 .16 .16

5 5 5 5 D2 .20 .20 .20 .20

31,59 8-15 .31,59

8-15 D3 8-15

.31-.59 .39-S9 10-15

1.42 1.42 36 36 36 (48) 48

1.42 (1.89) 1.89

.09 .09 2,2 2,2 3,2 2,5

.13 .10

CA10 CAA 1

CA4 CAD11 CA4-1 C L4 CAD1 2 CLIO CA20 CA25

A/E

B

C

D

F

M

FH3...

FH3...

30 1.18

-

30 1.18

48 1.89

64 2.52

48 1.89

64 2.52

48 1.89

64 2.52

48 1.89

64 2.52

28 1.10

35x46 1.38x1.81

43 1.69

50x56 1.97x2.20

45 1.77

46 1.81

5 .20

5 .20

6 .24

6 .24

6 .24

6 .24

29,5 1.16

29,5 1.16

39 1.54

39 1.54

39 1.54

39 1.54

39 1.54

39 1.54

..

12,5 .49

12,5 .49

20 .79

27 1.07

20 .79

27 1.07

20 .79

27 1.07

20 .79

27 1.07

VE22

VE22V

2.

VF22

VF22V

L' 3.7 .15'

CA25B C26 C32 C422 C43 C80 C125 L switches

Size $2

C315 L switches

Size S3

64 64 64 64 (88) 88 88 88 88 128 2.52 2.52 2.52 2.52 (3.46) 3.46 3.46 3.46 3.46 5.04 56 58 60 66 84 84 88 88 126 2.20 2.28 2.36 2.60 3.30 3.30 3.46 3.46 4.96 13,5 13,5 13,5 13,5 16 16 16 16 19,3 .53 .53 .53 .53 .63 .63 .63 .63 .76

4,1 4,1 4,1 5,4 5,4 5,4 5,4 5,4 7 .16 .16 .16 .21 .21 .21 .21 .21 .28

5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 .20 .20 .20 .20 .24 .24 .24 .24 .28 10-15 .39,59

10-15 .39-.59

10-15 .39-.59

10-15 39-S9

13-17 .51-S7

13-17 .51-.67

13-17 .51-S7

13-17 .51,67

15,5-20 .61-39

48 48 48 48 (68) 68 68 68 68 104 1.89 1.89 1.89 1.89 (2.68) 2.68 2.68 2.68 2.68 4.09 2,5 5 5 7 8,9 8,9 27 11,4 .10 .20 .20 .20 .28 .35 .35 1.06 .45

Dimensions in ( ) for revertive mounting plate

48 'see page 51

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 35 of 158

TECHNICAL DATA SHEET

For

Leworthy Street Pump Station

Equipment Type: Pushbuttons, Indicator Lights &.

Location: Switchboard Starter Section Common Control

Model Numbers: ZB Series

Manufacturer: TELEMECANIQUE

Supplier: Schneider Electric. 30 Graystone Street TINGALPA QLD 4173

Ph: 07 3890 2112 Fx: 07 3890 2098

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 36 of 158

Ltrig: 1.)eseription;

ID

.155 II IS

::,:, :6 e-z, r: ' r---,-.1_!..:tr 'fa.,:".!-"-IX",.-A'';'-'7;,:,34:- ",{7.-::. ,...`"-4,77:1zir ,,,-: :.....,:t; , .`':if:;;-,...%F.--_-. - -- r.;,.;,..d.w5-..-- .5.)%::. , T--I",,, -17,.h.',.-01.22%style 5Zrange' ibfiditifitrOZandi%igitalling.iiiiits,ebtrikisWg'-4:.- ',:A.- _-o,!;;- 1. t.,,,..* ","..':7 c'F.' - - .."Sf:t.t,:f._;,-, Xvt.' i.,,,,_,...:;_, .,-,1,...": :.-,,...A,tiTy..,-:-.:,, _ ,:^1._-, -

''',""---:2;.::4 ',.',,,,, i`" ,'2.,, . -.._, .:

JO

`41 het.

3

- 0 r j''' -.;:

roa

1A4.5

Jj

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 37 of 158

General (continued) Control and signalling units 0 22 Harmony® style 5 Pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights, with double insulated bezel

Characteristics : References :

pages 36011/2 to 36011/5 pages 3601212 to 36019/3 pages 36021/2 to 36021/9 Dimensions :

r"-rirsolowumemour

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 38 of 158

TECHNICAL DATA SHEET

For

Leworthy Street Pump Station

Equipment Type: Contactor

Location: Switchboard Starter Section

Model Numbers: LCF 225

Manufacturer: TELEMECANIQUE

Supplier: Schneider Electric. 30 Graystone Street TINGALPA QLD 4173

Ph: 07 3890 2112 Fx: 07 3890 2098

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 39 of 158

Characteristics Contactors Type LC1-F (115 to 800 A) Control circuit : a.c. or d.c. supply

T e

EnvlionnYent:

1.61:-F150, LC1-F1gc

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) toriformm to IEC 9474-1 . - ' ' V 1000 " - 1000 1000',

Conformin- toVDE 0110 r C - - -- V 1500 '.,,=:- 1500", ,1, 1500

Rated impulse withstand Coil not connected to the ' er Circuit -,,,' - .

voltage (Ulm"

Conforming to standards EN 60947-1fEN 60947 -441; IEC 947-1, IEC 947-4-1 JEM 1038

Product certifications CSA, UL, By GL, DWI, RINA, MAROS, LR 0 ,

Degree of protection _ .-.

COniorming to IEC 529 IP 20 front Id& with shrouds LA9,F , ,- - ,- ' 2 ,,.

- Conforming to VDE 0106 Front face protected again.stclit=ect finger contact with shrouds LA9-F

Protective treatment Standard version -- "T- H" -.. ' - ", -'''

Ambient air temperature around the device

Storage °O - 60 .4: 80 5

Operation , °C - 5 ..+, 55

Permissible at Uc (1) : 40 +.70

Maximum operating altitude Without derating 3000--'

Operating positions Without derating , ,.

.

f,,,,,,' '

,..,

,..

With derating

5-, , ,

,i/

4r1,4 M "

Apply the - - , pull-in voltage,

' the operational

,

following deratmg coefficients- :0.75 on the 0'9 on the drcip-out voltage and 0 a on current in AC-1

following derating coefficients .1 15 on the 11 on the drop-out voltage and 0.8 on

l 'c in AC-1

Making and breaking capaCities nor-the, durabilities can be assured

c, - Apply the

pull -in ,voltage, / : A, the a Opertionaurrent

In either,case; neither,lhe electrical and Mechanical

Forbidden

,--

Shock resistance (2) 1/2 sine wave = 11 ms

Contactor open 9 qn 9 gn, ' 7 gn ,

ContactOrtioSed ,

,

16 qn ",-,.

,

15 qn, 15 gn -

Vibration resistance (2) 5 300 Hz

Contactor open', 2 qn 2 gn 2 gn,

Contactortloseil 6tri 6 gn ,-;,-

5 qn (1) In these conditions, it is recommended that LX9-F coils be used for contactor sizes F115 to F225. (2) In the least favourable direction, without change of contact state (coil at Uc). For conditions requiring a much higher value resistance to mechanical shock, the use of our shock-proof contactors is recommended. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Selection guide : References : Dimensions : Schemes : pages 24565/2 to 24564/3 pages 25008/2 and 25008/3 pages 25011/2 and 2501113 page 25011/7

25007_Ver700-EN.fm/2 Telemecanique Schneider Electric

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 40 of 158

LC1 -F225 I

- LC1-F330:, LC7 -F400 . t-'

1000

1500

8

1000 -

156

ILC1-F630 LC1-F500 LC1-660

, l000 -foOo . -lobo

1500 1600 - -- 1500

4000

1500 .

EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1, IEC 947-1, IEC 947-4-1, JEM 1038 -;

CSA, UL.,-BV, GL, DNV, RINA, RMROS I UL, CSA , . ''' , -;

IP 20 front face with shrouds LA9-F - ,

,

,

Front face protected against direct finger contactwrthihroudSCA9-F -

, -TH" , ,-

- 60 + 80 ',' -_ 60 + 80

5 + 56 - 5 + 55

- 40,'+ 70 7 5. + 55

3000' ...

30°

v Apply the following derating coefficients:0 75 on the pull-in voltage. 0 9 on the drop-out voltage and 0 8 on the operational current in AC-1

ouniC -

Apply' the following derating Coefficients .1.15'On'the pull-in voltage, 1.1 on the drop-out voltage and 0 8 on the Opei:ational current In AC -1

, > In either case neither the making and breaking capacities nor the electncal and mechanical durabilibes can be assured ' - - mechanical

, .

,

6 gn ', 6 gn, 6 gn,, 9 gn 6 qn 5 gn , _ ,

6 qn ,r,

15 qn 15 qn 15 qn , 115 gn' 15 on 15 qn" ' 15 gn, 15 gn

2 gn, 2gn ' 2gn 1 5 qn -. 2- on - 2gn 2 5 gn 2gn , , , ,..

5 n , 5 gn .. ,

5 gn 5 gn 4 on , 4 qn ,

6 5 gn 4,gn ti i In thine,u n.snelofonne of le rowno-nnuarseleati fkmf I VO_P resole ha curl frsr rnnfnefne co,onc Pl1R ft, CI'IR (2) In the least favourable direction, without change of contact state (coil at Uc . For conditions requiring a much higher value resistance to mechanical shock, the use of our shock-proof contactors is recommended. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Schneider Electric Telemecanique 25007 Veiliki-EN fm/3

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 41 of 158

Characteristics Contactors Type LC1-F (115 to 800 A) Control circuit : d.c. supply

Type

Con 91cir91 ct araCtenStitS h LX4 coil

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)

Control voltage limits (0 5 55 °C)

Operational ; 7,

- Dropout,

LC1-F150 - ,

24 460 -24' 460

85 .1 1 Uc -- 015 -02 Uc

0 85. 1 1'Uc

015 02 Uc

1C1;f185 _

24 460

t1 Uc

015 .0.2 Uc

Average consumption at 20 °C and at Uc 7' Inniih

..,.. 560 " '

660 . - co:; -

,

' -

Sealed 4 5

Average operating time at Uc (1) ,Closing - -°C' - ms . ,

30 40, , "

30' 40; , , 30 'A0 -

Obening 70* ,

ms . 30 .50 30 sci, . 30. 50 ..< '

Note i The arcing imadepends on the circuit switched by the poles- For normal 3 -phase applications, the arcing time ms, usually less than 10 ms The load is isolated from the supply after a time equal to the'sum of Ahe opening time and the arcing time - ' .":-"

Mechanical durability at Uc in millions of operabrib cycles

-

10 10 10

Maximum operating rate at ambient temperature 5 55 °C

-.. , - ,

.t In operating cycles per hour ; .; 2400 2400 , 2400

Cabling Flexible cable without cable end

1 condbctors", ' ,.

Min /max c s a 1/4 - ,1/4 114

-'

2 loonr:1Ucters , ,

-

mm2 1/4 . 1/4 1/4

Flexible cable with cable end 1 conductor ,.. , '

mm2 , 1/4 . , 1/4

_, 1/4

2 conductors 1/2 5 - '

1/2.5 , 112 5 "

Solid cable without cable end I conductor -, mm2 1/4," 1/4 - 1/4

2'OonduOtors - 1/4 1/4 ,

1/4' . .

Tightening torque N m 1'2 1 2 1.2 ,

Mechanical latching 6ue to their rating, La1-F contactors'cannot be ,fitted with LA6-DK add-Oh mechenical latch blocks. -

For similar type of ,operation, use magnetic latching contactors C121:F . ,' , See Oxide 26091/2 to 26008/9 , "

(1) The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "Cr is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.

Selection guide : References : Dimensions : Schemes :

pages 24565/2 to 24564/3 pages 25008/2 and 25008/3 pages 25011/2 and 25011/3 page 2501117

25007_v,er7:00-EN.fmm Telemecanique Schneider Electric

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 42 of 158

LC1 -F4002

24 460 ' 24 :460 .

0 85. 1.11.1c

,

015 .02 UC

= , a 85 .1.1',Uc

0.15 0 2 Uc

-, 0.85 .1.1 Uc

0 15...02 Uc,. .

,. 0 85

6.2

.1 1 Uc ,

.035 UC' "

LC_ 1-F509,

< y ,

48 .440

- -- L61.4.30 , LC1-F780 LC1-F11301Y-:

110 ' 440

, 0 85 .1 1 LIc : 0.85 1 1 Up, 0 85' 1 1U

- 0.3..035 l/c - 02 .035 Uc` 02 0 4uc -

k

- - - .,. -

,...

' 110 '400

085 .1.1 ue

.05Uc",

800 759.4 1000 ' , 1109, 1600' 2 x 1006 ' 190

2 x 21 ' , ,-

12 ,

. / ' .,, - 30 40 , -

, ,

40. 50 ...' ,

40 . 60 .: ,':

50 60 ; 50'. 60 60 70. 70 80 .:- . ,

60 80

,i0. 50 40 .. 65 , 40 , 65 ' 45 `60 46, .60, , 40 50 , 100 130 , 46 50

Note : The arcing time,depends on the circuit switched by the poles For eormal, 3-phase appliCatiOns, the arcing time is usually less than- 0 ms, The load is isolated from the supply aftere bmeequal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time

10 10 10 10 10 5 5 ,

2400 2400 2400 2400 / 2400 , 1200 ' ,e 600 , 600

Min /max. c.s a , 1/4 1/4 ' 1/4 , - 1/4

--, ' 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 ,

1/4 , 1/4 1/4 1/4' '

"-; ,

1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 '

1/4 1/4' , 1/4.. , - 1/4, ', 1/4 1/4 , .

1/4 1/4 ,

1/2.5" 1/2'5 = 1/2'5 1/2 5 1/2.5 1/76 in 5 1/2 5

1/4 1/4 1/4 114 114 1/4 z 114 , 1/4 .;

1/4 1/4, 1/4 1/4". '1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4

1 2 1 2 - 12 . - 1 2:- 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

Due, to their rating, LC1-F contactors cannot be fitted with LA6713K add-on mechanical latch blocks For similar type of ojereon, use magnetic latching cont3ctortCR1-F- z'%

See Pages 26001/2 to26008/9 , . , - ,

The operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. The closing time "C" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time "0" is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate.

Schneider Electric IF Telemecanique 25007_V,41.09-EN.fm/9

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 43 of 158

References Contactors Type LC1-F a.c. 50/60 Hz supply coils /N.

LX1-FFsse

U(1-FGeee

Maximum ambient air temperature : 55'C. Above this, use an LX9-F coil, see page 25014/7. Operating cycles/hour (0 5 55 °C) : 5 2400. Control circuit Average

resistance voltage Uc 50 Hz V

Uc 60 Hz V

*6066iitadtois,-VC

24 42

at 20 °C ± 10 %

it5-and

Inductance of dosed circuit

0.27 0.94 0.78

Voltage code

Reference Weight

kg

0.04 0.13 0.11

B5 05 E6

LX1-FF024 LX1-FF042 LX1-FF040

0.430 0.430 0.430

48 - 1.17 0.16 E5 LX1-FF048 0.430 - 110 4.55 0.59 F6 LX1-FF092 0.430 - 120 4.77 0.64 G6 LX1-FF095 0.430 110 - 6.38 0.86 F5 UMFF110 0.430 115 - 6.38 0.86 FE5 UMFF110 0.430 1271132 - 9.14 1.15 G5 LX1-FF127 0.430 - 200/208 14.5 1.87 L6 LX1-FF162 0.430 - 220 18.4 2.38 M6 LX1-FF184 0.430 - 240 18.9 2.5 U6 LX1-FF187 0.430 220 265/277 28.1 344 M5 UMFF220 0.430 230 - 28.1 3.44 P5 UMFF220 0.430 240 - 31.1 4.1 U5 LX1-FF240 0.430 - 380 57.2 7.05 Q6 U1 -FF316 0.430 - 440 72.6 9.21 R6 LX1-FF360 0.430 380 460/480 86.9 10.3 Q5 LX1-FF380 0.430 400 - 86.9 10.3 V5 UMFF380 0.430 415 - 95.1 12 N5 LX1-FF415 0.430 500 - 141 17 S5 UMFF500 0.430 - 660 172 20.3 Y6 LX1-FF550 0.430 660/690 - 254 28.9 Y5 LX1-FF660 0.430 - 1000 414 48.9 - LX1-FF850 0.430 1000 - 610 68.5 - LX1-FF1000 0.430

Specifications Average consumption at 20 °C :

- inrush 50 Hz : 550 VA ; 60 Hz : 660 VA, - sealed 50 Hz: 45 VA ; 60 Hz : 55 VA, cos 9= 0.3. Heat dissipation : 12...16 W. 0 rating time at Uc closing = 23 35 n, opening = 5 - --15 ms

i

21-rj) Foncontacin +el- .1 0-47fr22,

24 0.18 0.03 B5 LX1-F0024 0.550 42 0.57 0.09 LX1-FG042 0.550

48 0.47 0.08 E6 LX1-FG040 0.550 48 0.71 0.12 E5 LX1-FG048 0.550

110 2.74 0.44 F6 DC1-FG092 0.550 115/120 2.87 0.49 G6 LX1-FG095 0.550

110 4.18 0.65 F5 DC1-FG110 0.550 115 4.18 0.65 FE5 LX1-FG110 0.550 127/132 5.35 0.86 G5 LX1-FG127 0.550

200/208 8.8 1.41 L6 DC1-FG162 0.550 220 11.1 1.8 M6 U(1-FG184 0.550 240 11A 1.87 U6 LX1-FG187 0.550

220 265/277 16.5 2.59 M5 DC1-FG220 0.550 230 16.5 2.59 P5 IA1-FG220 0.550 240 20.1 3.09 U5 LX1-FG240 0.550

380 34 5.32 Q6 LX1-FG316 0.550 440 43.5 6.94 R6 LX1-FG360 0.550

380 460/480 51.3 7.75 Q5 LX1-FG380 0.550 400 51.3 7.75 V5 DC1-FG380 0.550 415 62.3 9.06 N5 DC1-FG415 0.550 500 82.7 12.8 S5 DC1-FG500 0.550

660 103 15.3 Y6 LX1-FG550 0.550 660/690 154 21.8 Y5 LX1-FG660 0.550

1000 249 36.6 LX1-FG850 0.550 1000 370 51.6 LX1-FG1000 0.550

Specifications Average consumption at 20 °C :

- inrush 50 Hz : 805 VA ; 60 Hz : 970 VA, - sealed 50 Hz : 55 VA ; 60 Hz : 66 VA, cos 9 = 0.3. Heat dissipation : 18...24 W. Operating time at Uc : closing = 20...35 ms, opening = 7...15 ms.

Schemes :

page 25011/7

25014_Nkr6 00-EN.fm/2 W Telemecanique Schneider Electric

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 44 of 158

TECHNICAL DATA SHEET

For

Leworthy Street Pump Station

Equipment Type: Control Relays + Bases

Location: Common Control

Model Numbers: RY4S

Manufacturer: IZUNI

Supplier:

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 45 of 158

idec Relays

Key features of the RY series include:

Compact miniature size saves space

2PDT and 4PDT models, available with bifurcated crossbar contacts, ensure reliable low-current switching for dry circuit applications

Choice of plug-in/solder or PCB type terminals

Options include check button for test operation and indicator lights

DIN rail, surface, panel, and PCB type sockets available for a wide range of mounting applications

Contact Material RYZ RY4: Silver (Ag), gold-plated RY22.RY42 Ag-Pd alloy RM: Silver (Ag)

Contact Resistance RY2. RY4: 50mi2 maximum RY22 RY42: 100mS1 maximum RM: 30mQ maximum

Minimum Applicable Load

RY2, RY4: 5V DC, 10mA/24V DC, 5mA RM2: 24VDC/10mA, 5VDC/20mA (r value) Bifurcated

eference contacts: RY22, RY42:

1V DC, 100pA (reference value)

Operating Time 20ms maximum

Release Time toms maximum

Maximum Continuous Applied Voltage (AC/DC) at 20°C

110% of the rated voltage

Minimum Operating Voltage (AC/DC) at 20°C

80% of the rated voltage

Drop-Out Voltage (AC) 30% or more of the rated voltage

Drop-Out Voltage (DC) 10% or more of the rated voltage

La = o

'...

Power Consumption

RY2, RY22 DC: approximately 0.8W AC: approximately 1.1VA (50Hz), IVA (60Hz) RY4, RY42, RM2: DC: approximately 0.9W

approximately 1.4VA (50Hz), 12VA (60Hz) AC:

:= 5

Hcl- cn

Insulation Resistance 100M11 minimum (measured with 500V DC megger)

Dielectric Strength

RY2, RY22 Between live and dead parts: 1,500V AC, I minute; Between contact and coil: 1,500V AC, 1 minute; Between contacts of different poles: 1,500V AC, 1 minute; Between contacts of the same pole: 1,000V AC, 1 minute RY4, RY42, RM2,: Between live and dead parts: 2,000V AC, 1 minute; Between contact and coil: 2,000V AC, 1 minute; Between contacts of differ- ent poles: 2,000V AC, 1 minute; Between contacts of the same pole: 1,000V AC, 1 minute

Frequency Response 1,800 operations/hour

Temperature Rise Coil: 85°C maximum Contact 65°C maximum

Vibration Resistance 0 to 6G (55Hz maximum)

Shock Resistance RY2. RY22 100N (approximately 106) RY4, RY42, RM2 200N (approximately 206)

Life Electrical

Expectancy

RY2, RY4: over 200,000 operations (120V, 3A) RY22. RY42: over 200,000 operations (120V AC, 1A) RM2: over 500,00 operations (240V AC, 5A)

Mechanical over 50,000,000 operations

Operating Temperature -30 to +70°C

Weight DPDT: 23g; 4PDT: 34g (approximately)

www.idec.com

ii

RY/RM Series

311 UL Recognized Files No. E55996

MOW SIMI

File No. 8020813332452

E

eCSA Certified File No.LR35144

Ordering Information

Order standard voltages for fastest delivery. Allow extra delivery time for non-standard voltages.

Basic Part No. Coil Voltage:

RY4S-U AC110-120V

USA: (800) 262-IDEC or (408) 747-0550, Canada (888) 317-IDEC E-17

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 46 of 158

.410kY/RM Series idRelays ec

Part Numbers

Part Numbers: RY/RM Series with Options

03

Cc Coil Ratings

Termination

S

Solder /plug -in

Contact Configuration

DPDT small footprint

Basic Part No.

RY2S-U

Indicator Light

RY2S-UL

Check Button

RY2S-UC

Indicator Light and Check Button

RY2S-ULC

Top Bracket

RY2S-UT

DPDT (bifurcated contacts)

RY22S-U RY22S-UL RY22S-UC RY22S-ULC RY22S-UT

DPDT wide footprint RM2S-U RM2S-UL RM2S-UC RM2S-ULC RM2S-UT -

4PDT RY4S-U RY4S-UL RY4S-UC RY4S-ULC RY4S-UT

4PDT (bifurcated contacts)

RY42S-U RY42S-UL RY42S-UC RY42S-ULC RY42S-UT

V PCB 0.031

(0.8mm) wide

DPDT small footprint RY2V-U RY2V-UL RY2V-UC RY2V-ULC - DPDT

(bifurcated contacts) RY72V-U RY22V-UL RY22V-UC RY22V-ULC -

DPDT wide footprint RM2V-U RM2V-UL RM2V-UC RM2V-ULC - 4PDT RY4V-U RY4V-UL RY4V-UC RY4V-ULC - 4PDT

(bifurcated contacts) RY42V-U RY42V-UL RY42V-UC RY42V-ULC -

Ratings

Rated Voltage (V)

AC

Rated Current t15% at 20°C

60Hz 50Hz

.

I., . I

Coil Inrush (60Hz) Energizing De-Energizing

6V 150mA 200mA 170mA 240mA 18.80 9.411 250mA 340mA 0.09H 0.08H 0.06H 0.04H

12V 75mA 100mA 86mA 121mA 76.812 39.30 120mA 170mA 0.37H 0.30H 0.2211 0.16H

24V 37mA 50mA 42mA 60.5mA 30011 1530 56mA 85mA 1.511 1.2H .9H 0.63H

120V* 7.5mA 11mA 8.6mA 13.1inA 7,68012 4,17011 12mA 16mA 37H 33H 22H 15H

240V t 3.2mA 5.5mA 3.7mA 6.6mA 31,20011 15,21012 7mA 8mA 13011 130H 77H 62H

6V 128mA 150mA 470 400 DC N/A

12V 64mA 75mA 18811 1600

24V 32mA 36.9mA 7500 6500

48V 18mA 18.5mA 2,6600 2,6000

110V# 9.1mA 12,10011

ili* For RY4/RY42/RM2 relays = AC110/120V AC.

t For RY4/RY42/RM2 relays = 220/240V AC.

t For RY4 /RY42 /RM2 relays = 100/110V DC

Contact Ratings (gold plated) RY4, RY2

MIIIIINitiiiiiiiiiiii 30V DC

DPDT 3A 3A 3A 1.5A

4PDT 5A 5A 5A 1.5A

100V DC DPDT 0.2A - 0.2A 0.2A

4PDT 0.2A - 0.2A 0.2A

120V AC DPDT 3A 3A 1.5A 1.5A

4PDT 5A 5A 5A 5A

240V AC DPDT 3A 3A 0.8A 0.8A

4PDT 5A 5A 5A 5A

E-18 www.idec.com

Contact Ratings (bifurcated) RY42, RY22

Voltage Resistive UL/CSA Inductive UL/CSA

30V DC

120V AC

240V AC

Contact Ratings RM2

1A

1A

0.8A

0.5A

0.5A

0.4A

30V DC

110V DC

120V AC

240V AC

Resistive Inductive

Nominal

5A 5A 5A

Nominal

2.5A

0.4A 0.4A 0.4A

5A 5A 5A 2.5A

5A 5A 5A 2A

111 CSA

2.5A

2A

2.5A

0.4A

2.5A

2A

USA: (800) 262-IDEC or (408) 747-0550, Canada (888) 317-IDEC

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 47 of 158

idec Relays

RY4Part Numbers: Sockets .

.

RY2S RY22S

SY2S-05 SY2S-05C SY2S-51 SY2S-61

RM2 SM2S-05 SM2S-05C SM2S-51 SY4S-61 SY4S-62 RY4S

RY42S SY4S-05 SY4S-05C SY4S-51

illSee Section F for details on sockets. All DIN rail mount sockets shown above can be mounted using DIN rail BNDNI000.

Part Number Use With

SY2S -02F1® SFA-1010 SY2S-05, -05C SFA-202®

SFA-3010 SFA-302® SY2S-51, -61

SY4S-51F10

SY4S -02F1® SFA-1010 SY2S-05, -05C S FA-202®

S FA-3010 S FA-302® SY4S-51, -61

SY4S-51F1®

Top latch Side latch

0 Pullover spring

RY/RM Series

Internal Circuits

4110 www.idec.com

13 14

I-) I+)

RYZ RY22

3 4

9 rijr2j41 M.D> imI>

13 14

(+1

7"" 1_41

<Fim

9 12 m-eirlf- 13(4 (+)14

RM

RY4, RY42

ilkImage as viewed from bottom of relay. Refer to socket for exact wiring layout (Section F).

USA: (800) 262-IDEC or (408) 747-0550, Canada (888) 3I7-IDEC E-19

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 48 of 158

/RM Series

RY4/RM2

V a 30.5-

resistive/

DC

RY Bifurcated

RY2

1000

B 500

a 0

o. 100 a

e 50

20

a 1....1 . . . 1 . . . I I I

5 10 50 100 200 300

Load Voltage (V)

0.5 -

001 . . . 5 10 50 100 200 300

Load Voltage (V)

AC 110V Resistive

AC 220V Resistive

RY4

0 5 2

Load Current (A)

3

10'

10°

10'

-e

10'

RY4 AC Load

10'

o t). 106 C

0.

0

105

104

RY4 DC Load

Itt= num.

MIM. MILINIMMilha...411.....11MWT4MtilaTirrn =MI IlMiatirAlliM= 30V DC lesistive

30V DC

1,1V risammiTi 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A

.E-20

Load Current (A)

www.idec.com

Load Current (A)

RY2

1000

s 500

0

100

m 50

3

Relays idec

E - O :

3 0.5-

01

DC inflective

resistive

AC 4Wuoi

DC resistive

II 111111 I 1111111 I I

5 10 50 100 200 300

Load Voltage (V)

Bifurcated Contacts RY42, RY22

1000

500

c't

0 100

50

20

10

AC 110V Resistive

AC 220V Resistive

AC 110V Inductive

220V Inductive

RM2

Load Current (A)

AC 100V Resistive

AC 220V Resistive

1000

g 500

a O

4". AC 110V Induclive

AC 220V Inductive

100 1 2 3 4 5

Load Current (A)

00

Load Current (A)

DC 30V Resistive

DC 30V Inductive

DC 100V Resistive

DC 100V Inductive

100 1 2 3 4

Load Current (A)

5

USA: (800) 262-IDEC or (408) 747-0550, Canada (888) 317-IDEC

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 49 of 158

idec Relays RY/RM Series

Dimensions

Solder Terminal Plug-in RY2S RY22S

RY4S RY42S

Total length from panel surface including socket SY2S-02: 2.40" (61.6mm) maximum; SY2S-51: 1.56" (40rnm) Total length from panel surface including hold-down spring: SY2S-02: 2.48' (63.6mm) maximum; SY25 -51: 1.64' (42mm)

0.103" (2.64mm)

0 0.119" x 0.047" (3.05 x 1.2mm) Hole

E E

.40" (36mm) 0.214" Or Less (5.5mm)

0.552" (14.15mm)

Total length from panel surface including socket: SY4S-02: 2.40" (61.6mm) maximum; SY4S-51: 1.56" (40mm) Total length from surface including hold-down spring: SY4S-02: 2.48" (63.6mm) maximum; SY4S-51: 1.64 (42mm)

1 0.103"

(2.64mm)

1 0 0.1 9 x 0.047" (3.05 x 1.2mm) Hole

f, 0.019" (0.5mm)

0

.40" (36mm) 0.214" or Less (5.5mm)

PCB Terminal RY2V

RY22V

0.032" (0.8mm)

1.40" (36mm) or Less 0.138"

(3.5mm)

0.103" (2.64mm)

E

0.019" r.:1

(0.5mm)

PCB Terminal RY4V, RY42V

0.827* (21.2mm)

0.28" (7.2mm)

0 E

0.764" (19.6mm)

ME. 0.52"

(13.3mm)

0 0.195' (5mm) 2 Holes

With Top Bracket Plug-in RY2S-UT, RY22S-UT

0.103"

(00..5.019 0.162" n; E (4.15mm)

,

0.25" (6.4mm)

RY4S-UT RY42S-UT

0.646" (16.6mm)

L 0.148" (3.8mm)

I-1 0.552"

(14.15mm)

RY4V, RY42V: 0.031" (0.8mm)

0 103' (2.64mm)

j_ E

0.019" (0.5mm) p_

O

1.40" (36mm) RY4 , RY42V: or Less 0.137" (3.5mm)

www.idec.com

(4 4mm)

RY4V, RY42V: 0 0.039" (1mm)

14 Ho es

(21.5mm)

0.078"

.40" (36mm) or Less

0.253" (6.5mm)

0.253" (6.5mm)

ni (7)

5

0.102° (2.6mm)

0.019" 0.5mm)

0.162" (4.15mm)

N.

0.175" (4.5mm)

4

0.253" (6.5mm)

PCB Terminal RM2S, RMZV

0.161" (4.13mm)

E E

N,1

0 172' (4 4mm 3 Places

0.50" (12.8mm)

0.254" (6.5mm)

(21.7mm)

1.40" (36mm or Less 0.214"

(5.5mm)

RM2V: 0 0.039" (1mm) 8 Holes

0.161" (4.13mm) 0.019" (0 5mm)1 E i F,

= T 0

.40" (36mm) or Less

O

N

b?!1 IF !V .4.4 146.41

0.50"

- 0.254" 0.827" (21.2mm) 0.519" (6.5mm)

(13.3mm)

(12.8mm)

USA: (800) 262-IDEC or (408) 747-0550, Canada (888) 317-IDEC E-21

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 50 of 158

idec Sockets SY Series: DIN Rail Snap-Mount

SY4S Sockets

SY4S-05 Style 14-blade, snap-mount/surface mount

Terminal/Torque M3 screw with captive wire clamp (5.5 - 9 in lbs)

Wire Size Maximum up to 2-414AWG

Electrical Rating 300V, 7A

Compatible Relay RY4S, RY42S, RU4S, RU42S, RM2S, *RY2KS, *RY2LS (latching relay)

Compatible Timer GT5Y

Hold-Down Spring SY4S-51F1 for all relays; SY4S-51F3 for RY2KS only

Hold-Down Clip SFA-101 (top notch), SFA-202 (side notch) for all relays and timers

SY4S-05C Fingersafe Style 14-blade, snap-mount/surface mount

TenninaVTorque M3 screw with captive wire clamp, fingersafe (5.5 - 9 ine lbs)

Wire Size Maximum up to 2414AWG

Electrical Rating 300V, 7A

Compatible Relay RY4S, RY42S, RM2S, RU4S, RU42S, *RY2KS, "RY2LS (latching relay)

Compatible Timer GT5Y

Hold-Down Spring SY4S-51F1 for all relays; SY4S-51F3 for RY2KS only

Hold-Down Clip SFA-101 (top notch), SFA-202 (side notch) for GT5Y timer and relays

I. For socket mounting accessories, see page F-27.

2. For hold-down clip/spring selections, see page F-4.

www.idec.com

30

6

M3 Screw

28,5 when using BAA

18

18.5

25

DIN Rail (BAA)

2-e4.2 Mounting Hole M4 screw hole)

26

4max. 4.8min.

5.9max.

32.5 when using BAA

o3.2min.

2-04.2 Mounting Hole (M4 screw hole)

(cannot use ring terminal)

Terminal Arrangement

USA: (800) 262-IDEC or (408) 747-0550, Canada (888) 317-IDEC F-17

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 51 of 158

TECHNICAL DATA SHEET For

OCU NO.1 MCC

Equipment Type: Soft Starters

Location: Starter Sections

Model Numbers: MSF-017,060 & 075

Manufacturer: Emotron

Supplier: Emsby Pty Ltd P.O.Box 954 Archerfield Qld, 4108 Tel: 3274 2566 Fax:3274 2387

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 52 of 158

Valid for the following Soft starter Models: MSF-017 to MSF-1400

MSF SOFT STARTER

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Document number: 01-1363-01 Edition: r2 Date of release: 2001-04-20

Copyright Emotron AB 2000 Emotron retain the right to change specifications and illustrations in the text, without prior notification. The contents of this document may not be copied without the explicit permission of Emotron AB.

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 53 of 158

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Safety The soft starter should be installed in a cabinet or in an electrical control room.

The device must be installed by trained personnel. Disconnect all power sources before servicing. Always use standard commercial fuses, slow blow e.g. type gi, gG, to protect the wiring and prevent short circuiting. To protect the thyristors against short-circuit currents, superfast semiconductor fuses can be used if preferred. The normal guarantee is

valid even if superfast semiconductor fuses are not used.

Operating and maintenance personnel 1. Read the whole Instruction Manual before install-

ing and putting the equipment into operation. 2. During all work (operation, maintenance, repairs,

etc.) observe the switch-off procedures given in this instruction as well as any other operating instruction for the driven machine or system. See Emergency below

3. The operator must avoid any working methods which reduce the safety of the device.

4. The operator must do what he can to ensure that no unauthorised person is working on the device.

5. The operator must immediately report any changes to the device which reduce its safety to the user.

6. The user must undertake all necessary measures to operate the device in perfect condition only.

Installation of spare parts We expressly point out that any spare parts and accesso- ries not supplied by us have also not been tested or approved by us.

Installing and/or using such products can have a negative effect on the characteristics designed for your device. The manufacturer is not liable for damage aris- ing as a result of using non-original parts and accesso- ries.

Emergency You can switch the device off at any time with the mains switch connected in front of the soft starter (both motor and control voltage must be switched off).

Dismantling and scrapping The enclosure of the soft starter is made of recyclable material as aluminium, iron and plastic. Legal require- ments for disposal and recycling of these materials must be complied with.

The soft starter contains a number of components demanding special treatment, as for example thyristors. The circuit board contain small amounts of tin and lead. Legal requirements for disposal and recycling of these materials must be complied with.

2

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 54 of 158

CONTENTS

1. GENERAL INFORMATION 6 5.6 Keyboard lock 23

1.1 Integrated safety systems 6 5.7 Overview of soft starter opera-tion and parameter set-up. 23

1.2 Safety measures 6 1.3 Notes to the Instruction Manual 6 6. INSTALLATION AND 1.4 How to use the Instruction Manual 6 CONNECTION 24 1.5 Standards 6 6.1 Installation of the soft starter in a cabinet 24 1.6 Tests in accordance with norm EN60204 6 6.2 Connections 28 1.7 Inspection at delivery 7 6.3 Connection and setting on the 1.7.1 Transport and packing 7 PCB control card 32 1.8 Unpacking of MSF-310 and larger types 7 6.4 Minimum wiring 33

6.5 Wiring examples 34 2. DESCRIPTION 8

2.1 General 8 7. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 2.2 MSF control methods 9 SET-UP MENU 35

2.2.1 General features 9 7.1 Ramp up/down parameters 36 7.1.1 RMS current [005] 36 3. HOW TO GET STARTED 10 7.2 Start/stop/reset command 37

3.1 Checklist 10 7.2.1 2-wire start/stop with automatic reset 3.2 Main functions/Applications 10 at start 37

3.3 Motor Data 10 7.2.2 2-wire start/stop with separate reset 37

3.4 Setting of the start and stop ramps 11 7.2.3 3-wire start/stop with automatic reset at

3.5 Setting the start command 12 start. 37

3.6 Viewing the motor current 12 7.3 Menu expansion setting. 38

3.7 Starting 12 7.4 Voltage control dual ramp 38 7.5 Torque control parameters 39

4. APPLICATIONS AND FUNCTIONS 7.6 Current limit (Main Function) 39 SELECTION 13 7.6.1 Voltage ramp with current limit 39

4.1 Soft starter rating according to AC53a 13 7.6.2 Current limit 40

4.2 Soft starter rating according to AC53b 13 7.7 Pump control (Main Function) 40

4.3 MSF Soft starter ratings 14 7.8 Analogue Input Control (Main Function) 41

4.4 The Application Ratings List 14 7.9 Full voltage start, D.O.L. (Main Function) 41

4.5 The Application Functions List 16 7.10 Torque control (Main function) 42

4.6 Function and combination matrix 19 7.11 Torque boost 43

4.7 Special condition 20 7.12 Bypass 43

4.7.1 Small motor or low load 20 7.13 Power Factor Control 46

4.7.2 Ambient temperature below OxC 20 7.14 Brake functions 46

4.7.3 Phase compensation capacitor 20 7.15 Slow speed and Jog functions 48

4.7.4 Pole-changing contactor and two speed motor 20 7.15.1 Slow speed controlled by an external signal. ..48

4.7.5 Shielded motor cable 20 7.15.2 Slow speed during a selected time 49

4.7.6 Slip ring motors 20 7.15.3 Jog Functions 49

4.7.7 Pump control with soft starter and frequency 7.15.4 DC-brake after slow speed at stop [040] 49 inverter together 20 7.16 Motor data setting 50

4.7.8 Starting with counter clockwise rotating loads20 7.17 Programmable relay K1 and K2 51 4.7.9 Running motors in parallel 20 7.18 Analogue output 52 4.7.10 How to calculate heat dissipation in cabinets .20 7.19 Digital input selection 53 4.7.11 Insulation test on motor 20 7.20 Parameter Set 54 4.7.12 Operation above 1000 m 20 7.21 Motor protection, overload (F2 alarm) 55 4.7.13 Reversing 20 7.22 Mains protection 56

5. OPERATION OF THE SOFT 7.23 Application protection (load monitor) 57

STARTER 21 7.23.1 Load monitor max and min/protection

(F6 and F7 alarms) 57 5.1 General description of user interface 21 7.23.2 Pre-alarm 58 5.2 PPU unit 21 7.24 Resume alarms 61 5.3 LED display 22 7.24.1 Phase input failure Fl 61 5.4 The Menu Structure 22 7.24.2 Run at current limit time-out F4 61 5.5 The keys 23 7.25 Slow speed with JOG 61

3

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 55 of 158

7.26 7.27

Automatic return menu 62

Communication option, related Parameters 62 List of tables Table 1 Applications Rating List 15

7.28 Reset to factory setting [199] 63 Table 2 Application Function List 17 7.29 View operation 63 Table 3 Combination matrix 19 7.30 Keyboard lock 65 Table 4 Start/stop combination. 19 7.31 Alarm list 65 Table 5 The keys 23

8. PROTECTION AND ALARM .... 66 Table 6 Control modes 23 Table 7 MSF-017 to MSF-250. 25

8.1 Alarm description 66 Table 8 MSF-017 to MSF-250 25

8.1.1 Alarm with stop and requiring a separate reset66 Table 9 MSF-310 to MSF-1400 25

8.1.2 Alarm with stop and requiring only a new start command 66 Table 10 MSF-310 to MSF-1400. 25

8.1.3 Alarm with continue run 66 Table 11 Busbar distances 26

8.2 Alarm overview 67 Table 12 PCB Terminals 32 Table 13 Set-up Menu overview 35

9. TROUBLE SHOOTING 68

9.1 Fault, cause and solution 68

10. MAINTENANCE 71

11. OPTIONS 72

11.1 Serial communication 72

11.2 Field bus systems 72 11.3 External PPU. 72 11.3.1 Cable kit for external current transformers 72 11.4 Terminal clamp 73

12. TECHNICAL DATA 74

13. SET-UP MENU LIST 79

14. INDEX 82

REPRESENTATION 85

4

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 56 of 158

List of figures Fig. 54 Wiring for slow speed external input. 53 Fig. 1 Scope of delivery 7 Fig. 55 Parameter overview 54 Fig. 2 Unpacking of MSF-310 and larger models. 7 Fig. 56 Connection of external control inputs. 54 Fig. 3 Voltage control 8 Fig. 57 The thermal curve 55 Fig. 4 Current control 8 Fig. 58 Load monitor alarm functions. 60 Fig. 5 Torque control 8 Fig. 59 The 2 Jog keys. 61 Fig. 6 Standard wiring. 10 Fig. 60 Option RS232/485 72 Fig. 7 Example of start ramp with main Fig. 61 Option Profibus 72

function voltage ramp. 12 Fig. 62 Shows an example of the External PPU

Fig. 8 Rating example AC53a. 13 after it has been built in. 72 Fig. 9 Duty cycle, non bypass 13 Fig. 63 Cable kit 72 Fig. 10 Rating example AC53b. 13 Fig. 64 The terminal clamp. 73 Fig. 11 Duty cycle, bypassed 13 Fig. 12 MSF soft starter models. 21 Fig. 13 PPU unit. 21 Fig. 14 LED indication at different operation situation. .22 Fig. 15 Menu structure. 22 Fig. 16 MSF-017 to MSF-250 dimensions. 24 Fig. 17 Hole pattern for MSF-017 to MSF-250 24 Fig. 18 Hole pattern for MSF-170 to MSF-250

with upper mounting bracket instead of DIN-rail. 24

Fig. 19 MSF -310 to MSF -835. 26 Fig. 20 Hole pattern for screw attachment,

MSF-310 to MSF-835. Hole distance (mm). 26 Fig. 21 Busbar distances MSF -310 to MSF -835. 26 Fig. 22 MSF -1000 to -1400 27 Fig. 23 Hole pattern busbar MSF -1000 to -1400. 27 Fig. 24 Connection of MSF-017 to MSF -085. 28 Fig. 25 Connection of MSF-110 to MSF-145. 29 Fig. 26 Connection of MSF-170 to MSF-250 30 Fig. 27 Connection of MSF-170 to MSF-1400. 31 Fig. 28 Connections on the PCB, control card. 32 Fig. 29 Wiring circuit, "Minimum wiring" 33 Fig. 30 Analogue input control, parameter set,

analogue output and PTC input. 34 Fig. 31 Forward/reverse wiring circuit. 34 Fig. 32 Menu numbers for start/stop ramps,

initial voltage at start and step down voltage at stop. 36

Fig. 33 Menu numbers for dual voltage ramp at start/stop, initial voltage at start and step down-voltage at stop. 38

Fig. 34 Current limit 39 Fig. 35 Current limit 40 Fig. 36 Pump control 40 Fig. 37 Wiring for analogue input 41 Fig. 38 Setting voltage or current for analogue input. 41 Fig. 39 Full voltage start. 41 Fig. 40 Torque control at start/stop. 42 Fig. 41 Current and speed in torque control. 42 Fig. 42 The principle of the Torque Booster when

starting the motor in voltage ramp mode. 43 Fig. 43 Bypass wiring example MSF 310-1400. 44 Fig. 44 Current transformer position when Bypass

MSF-017 to MSF-250. 45 Fig. 45 Current transformer position when Bypass

MSF-310 to MSF-1400 45 Fig. 46 Braking time 46 Fig. 47 Soft brake wiring example. 47 Fig. 48 Slow speed controlled by an external signal. 48 Fig. 49 Slow speed at start/stop during a

selected time. 49 Fig. 50 Start/stop sequence and relay function

"Operation" and "Full voltage ". 51 Fig. 51 Wiring for analogue output. 52 Fig. 52 Setting of current or voltage output. 52 Fig. 53 Setting of .11 for current or voltage control. 53

5

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 57 of 158

1. GENERAL INFORMATION

1.1 Integrated safety systems The device is fitted with a protection system which reacts to:

Over temperature. Voltage unbalance. Over- and under voltage. Phase reversal Phase loss Motor overload protection thermal and PTC. Motor load monitor, protecting machine or process max or min alarm Starts per hour limitation

The soft starter is fitted with a connection for pro- tective earth 1 (PE).

MSF soft starters are all enclosed IP 20, except MSF-1000 and MSF-1400 which are delivered as open chassi IPOO.

1.2 Safety measures These instructions are a constituent part of the device and must be:

Available to competent personnel at all times. Read prior to installation of the device. Observed with regard to safety, warnings and infor- mation given.

The tasks in these instructions are described so that they can be understood by people trained in electrical engineering. Such personnel must have appropriate tools and testing instruments available. Such personnel must have been trained in safe working methods.

The safety measures laid down in DIN norm VDE 0100 must be guaranteed.

The user must obtain any general and local operating permits and meet any requirements regarding:

Safety of personnel. Product disposal. Environmental protection.

NOTE! The safety measures must remain in force at all times. Should questions or uncertainties arise, please contact your local sales outlet.

6 GENERAL INFORMATION

1.3 Notes to the Instruction Manual

WARNING! Warnings are marked with a warning triangle.

Serial number The information given in these instructions only applies to the device with the serial number given on the label on the front page. A plate with the serial number is fixed to the device.

Important For all enquiries and spare parts orders, please quote the correct name of the device and serial number to ensure that your inquiry or order is dealt with correctly and swiftly.

NOTE! These instructions only apply to the soft starters having the serial number given on the front page, and not for all models.

1.4 How to use the Instruction Manual

This instruction manual tells you how to install and operate the MSF soft starter. Read the whole Instruc- tion Manual before installing and putting the unit into operation. For simple start-up, read chapter 2. page 8 to chapter 3. page 10.

Once you are familiar with the soft starter, you can operate it from the keyboard by referring to the chap- ter 13. page 79. This chapter describes all the functions and possible setting.

1.5 Standards The device is manufactured in accordance with these regulations.

IEC 947-4-2 EN 60204-1 Electrical equipment of machines, part 1, General requirements and VDE 0113. EN 50081-2, EMC Emission EN 50081-1, EMC Emission with bypass EN 50082-2, EMC Immunity GOST UL508

1.6 Tests in accordance with norm EN60204

Before leaving the factory, the device was subjected to the following tests:

Through connection of earthing system; a) visual inspection. b) check that earthing wire is, firmly connected. Insulation Voltage Function

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 58 of 158

1.7 Inspection at delivery

Fig. 1 Scope of delivery.

1.7.1 Transport and packing The device is packed in a carton or plywood box for delivery. The outer packaging can be returned. The devices are carefully checked and packed before dis- patch, but transport damage cannot be ruled out.

Check on receipt: Check that the goods are complete as listed on the delivery note, see type no. etc. on the rating plate.

Is the packaging damaged? Check the goods for damage (visual check).

If you have cause for complaint If the goods have been damaged in transport:

Contact the transport company or the supplier immediately. Keep the packaging (for inspection by the transport company or for returning the device).

Packaging for returning the device Pack the device so that it is shock-resistant.

Intermediate storage After delivery or after it has been dismounted, the device can be stored before further use in a dry room.

1.8 Unpacking of MSF-310 and larger types

The soft starter is attached to the plywood box/loading stool by screws, and the soft starter must be unpacked as follows:

1. Open only the securing plates at the bottom of the box (bend downwards). Then lift up the box from the loading stool, both top and sides in one piece.

2. Loosen the three (3 pcs) screws on the front cover of the soft starter, down by the lower logo.

3. Push up the front cover about 20 mm so that the front cover can be removed.

4. Remove the two (2 pcs) mounting screws at the bottom of the soft starter.

5. Lift up the soft starter at the bottom about 10 mm and then push backwards about 20 mm so that the soft starter can be removed from the mounting hooks* at the top. The hooks are placed under the bottom plate and cannot be removed until the soft starter is pulled out.

6. Loosen the screws (2 pcs) for the mounting hooks and remove the hooks.

7. The hooks are used as an upper support for mount- ing the soft starter.

Fig. 2 Unpacking of MSF-310 and larger models.

GENERAL INFORMATION 7

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 59 of 158

2. DESCRIPTION

2.1 General The MSF is installed directly between the mains and the supply cable to the motor. If a mains contactor is

used it can be activated by the integrated K1 relay.

The MSF is developed for soft starting, stopping and braking three-phase motors.

There are 3 different kinds of soft starting control methods:

Control method 1-Phase The single phase controlled soft starters provide only a reduction in starting torque no control of current or torque. These starters need a main and bypass contactor as well as external motor protec- tions. This is a open loop voltage controller. These starters are mainly in the power up to 7.5 kW. Control method 2-Phase The two phase starters can start a motor without a mains contactor, but in that case voltage still is present at the motor when it's stopped. These start- ers are mainly in the power up to 22 kW Control method 3-Phase In the three phase Soft Starters there are different technologies:

Voltage control Current control Torque control

Voltage control This method is the most used control method. The starter gives a smooth start but doesn't get any feedback on current or torque. The typical settings to optimize a voltage ramp are: Initial voltage, ramp time, dual ramp time.

Current (A)

FLC -

03-F116

Time

Fig. 3 Voltage control

8 DESCRIPTION

Current control The voltage ramp can be used with a current limit which stops the voltage ramp when the set maximum current level is reached. The maximum current level is the main setting and must be set by the user depending the maximum current allowed for the application.

Current (A)

Current Limit

FLC

Time

03-F111

Fig. 4 Current control

Torque control Is the most sufficient way of starting motors. Unlike voltage and current based systems the soft starter moni- tors the torque need and allows to start with the lowest possible current. Using a closed loop torque controller also linear ramps are possible. The voltage ramp can not hold back the motor starting torque this results in a current peak and unlinear ramps. In the current ramp there will be no peak current, but a higher current for a longer period of time during the start compared to torque control. Current starting doesn't give linear ramps. The linear ramps are very important in many applications. For an example, to stop a pump with an unlinear ramp will give water hammer. Soft starters which doesn't monitor the torque, will start and stop to fast if the load is lighter than the setting of current or ramp time.

Fig. 5 Torque control

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 60 of 158

2.2 MSF control methods MSF Soft Starters control all three phases supplied to the motor. It manages all the 3 possible starting meth- ods where the closed loop Torque control is the most efficient way of starting and stopping motors.

2.2.1 General features As mentioned above soft starters offer you several fea- tures and the following functions are available:

Torque controlled start and stop Current limit control at start Application "Pump" External analogue input control Torque booster at start Full voltage start (D.O.L) Dual voltage ramp at start and stop Bypass Dynamic DC-brake or Softbrake Slow speed at start and stop Jogging forward and reverse Four parameter sets Analogue output indicating current, power or voltage Viewing of current, voltage, power, torque, power consumption, elapsed time etc. Integrated safety system acc. to § 1.1, page 6, with an alarm list.

DESCRIPTION 9

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 61 of 158

3. HOW TO GET STARTED

L2

L3

N

PE

L1 1213 PE 01 02 PE K1 n 23L,3 24 33k24

71 72 T3 PE 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Ltri start /slop

69 70

75 76 77

03-F17

Fig. 6 Standard wiring.

This chapter describes briefly the set-up for basic soft start and soft stop by using the default "Voltage Ramp" function.

WARNING! Mounting, wiring and setting the device into operation must be carried out by properly trained personnel. Before set-up, make sure that the installation is according to chapter 6. page 24 and the Checklist below.

3.1 Checklist Mount the soft starter in accordance with chapter 6. page 24. Consider the power loss at rated current when dimensioning a cabinet, max. ambient temperature is 40°C (see chapter 12. page 74). Connect the motor circuit according to Fig. 6. Connect the protective earth. Connect the control voltage to terminals 01 and 02 (100 - 240 VAC or 380-500 VAC). Connect relay K1 (PCB terminals 21 and 22) to the contactor - the soft starter then controls the contac- tor. Connect PCB terminals 12 and 13 to, e.g., a 2-way switch (closing non-return) or a PLC, etc., to obtain control of soft start/soft stop.1) Check that the motor and supply voltage corre- sponds to values on the soft starter's rating plate. Ensure the installation complies with the appropri- ate local regulations.

1) The menu 006 must be put to 01 for start/stop command from keyboard.

10 HOW TO GET STARTED

3.2 Main functions/Applications

WARNING! Make sure that all safety measures have been taken before switching on the supply.

Switch on the control voltage (normally 1 x 230 V), all segments in the display and the two LED's will be illu- minated for a few seconds. Then the display will show menu 001. An illuminated display indicates there is supply voltage on the PCB. Check that you have mains voltage on the mains contactor or on the thyristors. The settings are carried out according to following:

The first step in the settings is to set menu 007 and 008 to "ON" to reach the main functions 020-025 and motor data 041-046.

NOTE! The main function Is chosen according to the application. The tables in the applications and functions selection (table 1, page 15), gives the information to choose the proper main function.

3.3 Motor Data Set the data, according to the motor type plate to obtain optimal settings for starting, stopping and motor protection.

NOTE! The default settings are for a standard 4-pole motor acc. to the nominal power of the soft-starter. The soft starter will run even if no specific motor data is selected, but the performance will not be optimal.

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 62 of 158

0 4 1 0 0

0 Nominal motor voltage

Default: 400 V

Range: 200-700 V

0 4 2 0 0

4 5 Nominal motor current

Default: Nominal current soft starter

Range: 25% - 150% of Insoft in Amp

0 4 3 0 0

2 Nominal motor power

Default: Nominal power soft starter

Range: 25% - 300% of Prisoft in kW

0 4 4 0 0

4 5 0 Nominal motor speed

Default: Nominal speed soft starter Range: 500-3600 rpm

0 4 5 0 0

8 6 Nominal motor cos phi

Default: 0.86

Range: 0.50-1.00

4 6 0 0

5 0 Nominal frequency

Default: 50 Hz

Range: 50/60 Hz

NOTE! Now go back to menu 007 and set it to "oFF' and then to menu 001.

3.4 Setting of the start and stop ramps

The menu's 002 and 003 can now be set to adjust the start ramp up time and the stop ramp down time.

0 0 2 0 0

0 Start time ramp 1

Default: 10 sec

Range: 1-60 sec

Estimate the starting-time for the motor/machine. Set "ramp up time" at start (1-60 sec). Key "ENTER 4-1 " to confirm new value. Key "NEXT ", "PREV 4- " to change menu.

0 4 0 0

0 F F

Stop time ramp 1

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 2-120 sec

Set "ramp down time" at stop (2-120 s). "oFF" if only soft start requires.

HOW TO GET STARTED 11

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 63 of 158

3.5 Setting the start command 3.7 Starting As default the start command is set for remote opera- tion via terminal 11, 12 and 13. For easy commission- ing it is possible to set the start command on the start key on the keyboards. This is set with menu 006.

0 6 0 0

2 Selection of control mode

Default: 2

Range: 1,2,3

Menu 006 must be set to 1 to be able to operate from keyboard.

NOTE! Factory default setting Is remote control (2).

To start and stop from the keyboard, the "START/ STOP" key is used.

To reset from the keyboard, the "ENTER 40 / RESET" key is used. A reset can be given both when the motor is running and when the motor is stopped. A reset by the keyboard will not start or stop the motor.

3.6 Viewing the motor current Set the display to menu 005. Now the Motor current can be viewed on the display.

0 0 5 0 0

O. 0 RMS current read-out

Default:

Range: 0.0-9999 Amp.

NOTE! The menu 005 can be selected at any time when the motor Is running.

12 HOW TO GET STARTED

WARNING! Make sure that all safety measures have been taken before starting the motor in order to avoid personal injury.

Start the motor by pressing the "START/STOP" key on the keyboard or through the remote control, PCB terminal 11, 12 and 13. When the start command is given, the mains contactor will be activated by relay K1 (PCB terminal 21 and 22), and the motor then starts softly.

Fig. 7 Example of start ramp with main function voltage ramp.

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 64 of 158

4. APPLICATIONS AND FUNCTIONS SELECTION

This chapter is a guide to select the correct soft starter rating and the selection of the Main function and addi- tional functions for each different application.

To make the right choice the following tools are used:

The norm AC53a. This norm helps selecting the soft starter rating with regard to duty cycle, starts per hour and maximum starting current. The Application Rating Ust. With this list the soft starter rating can be selected depending on the kind of application used. The list use 2 levels of the AC53a norm. See table 1, page 15. The Application Function Ust. This table gives an complete overview of most common applications and duties. For each applica- tions the menu's that can be used are given. See table 2, page 17. Function and Combination matrix. With these tables it is easy to see which combina- tions of Main and additional functions are possible, see table 3, page 19 and table 4, page 19.

4.1 Soft starter rating according to AC53a

The IEC947-4-2 standard for electronic starters defines AC53a as a norm for dimensioning of a soft starter.

The MSF soft starter is designed for continuous running. In the Applications table (table 1, page 15) two levels of AC53a are given. This is also given in the technical data tables (see chapter 12. page 74).

210A : AC-53a 5.0 - 30 : 50 - 10

(0345m

Starts per hour

On-load factor (on-load duty cycle as percent- age of operation cycle)

Start time (seconds)

Start current (multiple of FLC)

Rated FLC (Full Load Current) of starter under prescribed condi- tions .

Fig. 8 Rating example AC53a.

The above example indicates a current rating of 210 Amps with a start current ratio of 5.0 x FLC (1050A) for 30 seconds with a 50% duty cycle and 10 starts per hour.

NOTE! If more than 10 starts/hour or other duty cycles are needed, please contact your supplier.

I-

0

Starts per hour

Start Duration

Run Time Off Time

- - - -

TIME

Duty Cycle = (Start Duration + Run Time)

(Start Duration + Run Time + Off Time) (03-F60)

Fig. 9 Duty cycle, non bypass.

4.2 Soft starter rating according to AC53b

This norm is made for Bypass operation. Because the MSF soft starter is designed for continuous operation this norm is not used in the selection tables in this chapter.

210A : AC-53b 5 0 - 30 : 1440

Off time (seconds between starts)

Start time (seconds)

Start current (multiple of FCL) Rated FLC (Full Load Cur- rent) of starter under prescribed conditions

Fig. 10 Rating example AC53b.

I- z LLJ CC CC

C.)

Start Duration

Off Time

TIME (03-F61)

Fig. 11 Duty cycle, bypassed

The above example indicates a current rating of 210 Amps with a start current ratio of 5.0 x FLC (1050A) for 30 seconds with a 24-minute period between starts.

APPLICATIONS AND FUNCTIONS SELECTION 13

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 65 of 158

4.3 MSF Soft starter ratings According to the norms AC53a and AC53b a soft starter can have many current ratings.

NOTE! Because the MSF soft starter is designed for continuous operation the norm AC53b Is not used In the application rating ilst.

With help of the Application Rating List with typical starting currents and categories in the AC53a level (see table 1, page 15 and table 2, page 17) it is easy to select the proper soft starter rating with the application.

The Application Rating List uses two levels for the AC53a norm:

AC53a 5.0-30:50-10 (heavy duty) This level will be able to start all applications and follows directly the type number of the soft starter. Example: MSF 370 is 370 Amps FLC and then 5

time this current in starting. AC 53a 3.0-30:50-10 (normal/light duty) This level is for a bit lighter applications and here the MSF can manage a higher FLC. Example: MSF 370 in this norm manage 450 Amps FLC and the 3 times this current in starting

NOTE! To compare Soft Starters It's Important to ensure that not only FLC (Full Load Current) Is compared but also that the operating parameters are Identical.

4.4 The Application Ratings List Table 1 gives the Application Ratings List. With this list the rating for the soft starter and Main Function menu can be selected.

Description and use of the table: Applications. This column gives the various applications. If the machine or application is not in this list, try to iden- tify a similar machine or application. If in doubt pleas contact your supplier. AC53a ratings. The rating according to AC53a norm is here classi- fied in 2 ratings. The first for normal/light duty (3.0-30:50-10) and the second for heavy duty (5.0-30:50-10) Typical Starting current. Gives the typical starting current for each applica- tion Main Function menu. The Main Function menu is advised here. "25;=1", means: program selection 1 in menu 25. Stop function. Gives a possible Stop function if applicable. "36;=1 / 38-40", means: program selection 1 in menu 36, also menus 38 to 40 can be selected.

14 APPLICATIONS AND FUNCTIONS SELECTION

EXAMPLE: Roller Mill:

This is an application for heavy duty, Typical starting current of 350%. Main function Torque ramp start (menu 25) will give the best results. Stop function Dynamic Brake (menu 36, selection 1) can be used. As well as the Slow Speed at start and stop (menu 38-40) can be used for better start and stop per- formance.

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 66 of 158

Table 1 Applications Rating List

Applications AC53a 3.0-30:50-10 (normal/light)

AC 53a 5.0-30:50-10

(heavy)

Typical starting

current %

Main function Menu nr.

Stop function Menu nr.

General & Water

Centrifugal Pump

Submersible Pump

Conveyor

Compressor: Screw

Compressor, Reciprocating

Fan

Mixer

Agitator

x 300 22 22 x 300 22 22

x 300-400 25;=1 36;=1 / 38-40 x 300 25 -

x 400 25;=1 .

x 300 25;=2 x 400-450 25;=1 -

x 400 25;=1

Metals & Mining

Belt Conveyor

Dust Collector

Grinder

Hammer Mill

Rock Crusher

Roller Conveyor

Roller Mill

Tumbler

Wire Draw Machine

x 400 25;=1 36; =1 / 38-40 x 350 x 300 25;=1 36;=1

x 450 25:=1 36;=2 x 400 25; =1 -

x x 350 25;=1 36;=1 / 38-40 x 450 25; =1 36;=1 or 2

x 400 25;=1 .

x 450 25;=1 36;=1 or 2

Food Processing

Bottle Washer

Centrifuge

Dryer

Mill

Palletiser

Separator

Slicer

x 300 25;=2 x 400 25;=1 36;=1 or 2

x 400 25;=2 x 450 25;=1 36;=1 or 2

x 450 25;=1 x 450 25;=1 36;=1 or 2

x 300 25; =1

Pulp and Paper

Re-Pulper

Shredder

Trolley

x 450 25;=1 x 450 25; =1

x 450 25;=1

Petrochemical

Ball Mill

Centrifuge

Extruder

Screw Conveyor

x 450 25;=1 x 400 25;=1 36;=1 or 2

x 500 25;=1 x 400 25;=1

Transport & Machine Tool

Ball Mill

Grinder

Material Conveyor

Palletiser

Press

Roller M ill

Rotary Table

Trolley

Escalator

x 450 25;=1 x 350 25;=1 36;=1 x 400 25;=1 36;=1 / 38-40 x 450 25:=1 x 350 25;=1 x 450 25;=1

_ x 400 25;=1 36;=1 / 38-40 x 450 25;=1 x 300-400 25;=1

Lumber & Wood Products

Bandsaw

Chipper

Circular Saw

Debarker

Planer

Sander

x 450 25;=1 36;=1 or 2

x 450 25;=1 36;=1 or 2

x 350 25;=1 36;=1 or 2

-, x 350 25;=1 36;=1 or 2

x 350 25;=1 36;=1 or 2

x 400 25;=1 36;=1 or 2

APPLICATIONS AND FUNCTIONS SELECTION 15

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 67 of 158

4.5 The Application Functions List This list gives an overview of many different applica- tions/duties and a possible solution with one of the many MSF functions.

Description and use of the table: Application /Duty. This column gives the various applications and level of duty. If the machine or application is not in this list, try to identify a similar machine or application. If in doubt pleas contact your supplier. Problem. This column describes possible problems that are familiar for this kind of application. Solution MSF. Gives the possible solution for the problem using one the MSF function. Menus. Gives the menu numbers and selection for the MSF function. "25;=1", means: program selection 1 in menu 25. "36;=1 / 34,35", means: program selection 1 in menu 36, menus 34 and 35 are related to this func- tion.

16 APPLICATIONS AND FUNCTIONS SELECTION

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 68 of 158

Table 2 Application Function List

Application/ Duty Problem Solution MSF Menus

PUMP Normal

Too fast start and stops MSF Pump application with following start/stop features: 22 Non linear ramps Linear ramps without tacho. Water hammer Torque ramps for quadratic load High current and peaks during starts. Pump is going in wrong direction Phase reversal alarm 88 Dry running Shaft power underload 96-99 High load due to dirt in pump Shaft power overload 92-95

COMPRESSOR Normal

Mechanical shock for compressor, motor and transmissions Linear Torque ramp or current limit start. 25;=1 or

20,21 Small fuses and low current available. Screw compressor going in wrong direction Phase sequence alarm 88 Damaged compressor if liquid ammonia enters the compressor screw. Shaft power overload 92-95

Energy consumption due to compressor is run- ning unloaded Shaft power underload 96-99

CONVEYOR Normal/Heavy

Mechanical shocks for transmissions and trans- ported goods. Linear Torque ramp 25;=1

Filling or unloading conveyors Slow speed and accurate position control. 37-40,57,58 Conveyor jammed Shaft power overload 92-95 Conveyor belt or chain is off but the motor is still running Shaft power underload 96-99

Starting after screw conveyor have stopped due to overload. Jogging in reverse direction and then starting in forward.

Conveyor blocked when starting Locked rotor function 75

FAN Normal High starting current in end of ramps Torque ramp for quadratic need 25;=2

Slivering belts.

Fan is going in wrong direction when starting. Catches the motor and going easy to zero speed and then starting in right direction.

Belt or coupling broken Shaft power underload 96-99 Blocked filter or closed damper.

PLANER Heavy

High inertia load with high demands on torque and current control.

Linear Torque ramp gives linear acceleration and lowest possible starting current. 25;=1

Need to stop quick both by emergency and pro- duction efficiency reasons.

Dynamic DC brake without Contactor for medium loads and controlled sensor less soft brake with reversing con- factor for heavy loads.

36;=1,34,35 36;=2,34,35

High speed lines Conveyor speed set from planer shaft power analog out- ut. 54-56

Worn out tool Shaft power overload 92-95 Broken coupling Shaft power underload 96-99

ROCK CRUSHER Heavy

High enertia Linear Torque ramp gives linear acceleration and lowest possible starting current. 25;=1

Heavy load when starting with material Torque boost 30,31 Low power if a diesel powered generator is used.

Wrong material in crusher Shaft power overload 92-95 Vibrations during stop Dynamic DC brake without Contactor 36;=1,34,35

BANDSAW Heavy

High inertia load with high demands on torque and current control.

Linear Torque ramp gives linear acceleration and lowest possible starting current. 25;=1

Need to stop quick both by emergency and pro- duction efficiency reasons.

Dynamic DC brake without Contactor for medium loads and controlled sensor less soft brake with reversing con- tactor for heavy loads.

36;=1,34,35 36;=2,34,35

High speed lines Conveyor speed set from band saw shaft power analog output. 54-56

Worn out saw blade Shaft power overload

Broken coupling, saw blade or belt Shaft power underload

CENTRIFUGE Heavy High inertia load

Linear Torque ramp gives linear acceleration and lowest possible starting current. 25;=1

To high load or unbalanced centrifuge Shaft power overload

Controlled stop Dynamic DC brake without Contactor for medium loads and controlled sensor less soft brake with reversing con- tactor for heavy loads.

36;=1,34,35 36;=2,34,35

Need to open centrifuge in a certain position. Braking down to slow speed and then positioning control. 37-40,57,58

APPLICATIONS AND FUNCTIONS SELECTION 17

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 69 of 158

Table 2 Application Function List

Application/ Duty Problem Solution MSF Menus

MIXER Heavy Different materials Linear Torque ramp gives linear acceleration and lowest

possible starting current. 25;=1

Need to control material viscosity Shaft power analog output 54-56 Broken or damaged blades Shaft power overload 92-95

Shaft power underload 96-99

HAMMER MILL Heavy Heavy load with high breakaway torque Linear Torque ramp gives linear acceleration and lowest

possible starting current. 25;=1

Torque boost in beginning of ramp. 30,31 Jamming Shaft power overload 92-95

Fast stop Controlled sensor less soft brake with reversing contactor for heavy loads.

Motor blocked Locked rotor function 75

EXAMPLE: Hammer Mill:

This is an application for heavy duty, Main function Torque ramp start (menu 25) will give the best results. Torque boost to overcome high breakaway torque (menu 30 and 31) Overload alarm function for jamming protection (menu 92 and 95) Stop function Soft Brake (menu 36, selection 2) can be used. Menu 34 and 35 to set the brake time and strength.

18 APPLICATIONS AND FUNCTIONS SELECTION

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 70 of 158

4.6 Function and combination matrix

Table 3 gives an overview of all possible functions and combination of functions.

1. Select function in the horizontal "Main Function" column. Only one function can be selected in this column, at a time.

2. In the vertical column "Additional Functions" you will find all possible function that can be used together with your selected main function.

Table 3 Combination matrix

cr, c 0 0 c =

To c 0 .73

lc Main Functions '0 Q

a+ , .... 0 t) °- E (13

6 o 0

a o r, 0- E CU

(73 = 0

ER1

0') 0 - Cn

co

o_ >,

co

Cf) m 1:D

r2 ..E.

0 0 8 ... C.)

42 +- 0 3 o a

....., 2 o --- r, o 0 .sa

S Er 0 1-

To c _

ct - --, -a 2 .0 a) -,Y

.c :.-.

130 .E la 0 -,

-0 6 a , 0

V)

a,

172 ,

C o 0 ,- 2 - i=

0 a)

u

o -Th

Q)

17) ,- E' 0 C) - 52 t ..D,

x w

g :,70 ..

a, a- 2 0. 0 ..... CD a E 0

12, 0 0 ... ai

Cr) 4-, 0 E 2 co 0_

cr) 0 a)

-(f3

m ,-,'--

0 CD

> 0 .,_ ,c,

E" >, 0

.---. CN 6 0 ..-- o .X 2 15

0 cn

Voltage ramp start/stop (default) X X X X X X X X X X X

Torque control start/stop (menu 025) X X X X X X X X X

Voltage ramp with current limit (menu 020) X X X X X X X X X X X

Current limit start (menu 021) X X X X X X X X X X X

Pump control (menu 022) X X X

Analog input (menu 023) X X

Direct on line start (menu 024) X X X

By using one parameter set, the following start/stop table is given.

Table 4 Start/stop combination.

NOTE! Voltage and torque ramp for starting only with softbrake.

START FUNCTION

z 0 0 z m LL

0- 0- I- co

a ..).

,U; - E 2occc 008- teg '5 >

a o ig -5 ,- '

cr i5

1-

_ o :-.

0-2r, E = a

...

To c a

a 0 a) , . 0.2% a) .= 0

a) x 0 ,-- 03

0 .-' 0 ;.)

g15 c >, 0

a)

0 cn

Voltage ramp start X X X X

Torque control start X X X X

Current limit start X X X X

Voltage ramp with current limit X X X X

Pump control X X

Analog input X X

Direct on line start X

By using different parameter sets for start and stop, it is

possible to combine all start and stop functions.

APPLICATIONS AND FUNCTIONS SELECTION 19

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 71 of 158

4.7 Special condition

4.7.1 Small motor or low load The minimum load current for the soft starter is 10% of the rated current of the soft starter. Except for the MSE-017 there the min. current is 2 A. Example MSE-210, rated current = 210 A. Min. Current 21 A. Please note that this is "min. load current" and not min. rated motor current.

4.7.2 Ambient temperature below 0°C For ambient temperatures below 0°C e.g. an electrical heater must be installed in the cabinet. The soft starter can also be mounted in some other place, due to that the distance between the motor and the soft starter is

not critical.

4.7.3 Phase compensation capacitor If a phase compensation capacitor is to be used, it must be connected at the inlet of the soft starter, not between the motor and the soft starter.

4.7.4 Pole-changing contactor and two speed motor

The switching device must be connected between the output of the soft starter and the motor.

4.7.5 Shielded motor cable It is not necessary to use shielded wires together with soft starters. This is due to the very low radiated emis- sions.

NOTE! The soft starter should be wired with shielded con- trol cable to fulfill EMC regulations acc. to § 1.5, page 6.

4.7.6 Slip ring motors Slip ring motors can not be used together with the soft starter. Unless the motor is rewinded (as a squirrel cage motor). Or keep the resistors in, please contact your supplier.

4.7.7 Pump control with soft starter and frequency inverter together

It is possible e.g. in a pump station with two or more pumps to use one frequency inverter on one pump and soft starters on each of the other pumps. The flow of the pumps can then be controlled by one common control unit.

4.7.8 Starting with counter clockwise rotating loads

It is possible to start a motor clockwise, even if the load and motor is rotating counter clockwise e.g. fans. Depending on the speed and the load "in the wrong direction" the current can be very high.

20 APPLICATIONS AND FUNCTIONS SELECTION

4.7.9 Running motors in parallel When starting and running motors in parallel the total amount of the motor current must be equal or lower than the connected soft starter. Please note that it is not possible to make individual settings for each motor. The start ramp can only be set for an average starting ramp for all the connected motors. This applies that the start time may differ from motor to motor. This is also even if the motors are mechanically linked, depending on the load etc.

4.7.10 How to calculate heat dissipation in cabinets

See chapter 12. page 74 "Technical Data", "Power loss at rated motor load (IN)", "Power consumption control card" and "Power consumption fan". For further cal- culations please contact your local supplier of cabinets, e.g. Rittal.

4.7.11 Insulation test on motor When testing the motor with high voltage e.g. insula- tion test the soft starter must be disconnected from the motor. This is due to the fact that the thyristors will be seriously damage by the high peak voltage.

4.7.12 Operation above 1000 m All ratings are stated at 1000 m over sea level. If a MSF is placed for example at 3000 m it must be derated unless that the ambient temperature is lower than 40 C and compensate for this higher pressure.

To get information about motors and drives at higher altitudes please contact your supplier to get technical information nr 151.

4.7.13 Reversing Motor reversing is always possible. See Fig. 31 on page 34 for the advised connection of the reverse contactors.

At the moment that the mains voltage is switched on, the phase sequence is monitored by the control board. This information is used for the Phase Reverse Alarm (menu 88, see § 7.22, page 56).

However if this alarm is not used (factory default), it is also possible to have the phase reversal contactors in the input of the soft starter.

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 72 of 158

5. OPERATION OF THE SOFT STARTER

Fig. 12 MSF soft starter models.

5.1 General description of user interface

WARNING! Never operate the soft starter with removed front cover.

To obtain the required operation, a number of parame- ters must be set in the soft starter.

Setting/configuration is done either from the built- in keyboard or by a computer/control system through the serial interface or bus (option). Controlling the motor i.e. start/stop, selection of parameter set, is done either from the keyboard, through the remote control inputs or through the serial interface (option).

Setting

WARNING! Make sure that all safety measures have been taken before switching on the supply.

Switch on the supply (normally 1 x 230 V), all seg- ments in the display will light up for a few seconds. Then the display will show menu 001. An illuminated display indicates there is supply voltage on the PCB.

Check that you have voltage on the mains contactor or on the thyristors. To be able to use all extended functions and optimize of the performance, program the motor data.

5.2 PPU unit

03-F28

B. B. B. 0 RUMINA

O SIARTATOP

El. Et El. Et VALUE of

d

i r st (Q os lOS

atop mok oae aatop (%)

0 4 i (m) 0 5 c oe Swami Nob or IStolded (madam

7/// STOP ; ////. PREV NEXT

Fig. 13 PPU unit.

The programming and presentation unit (PPU) build-in operator panel with two light emitting diodes, three + four seven-segment LED-displays and a key- board.

is a

OPERATION OF THE SOFT STARTER 21

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 73 of 158

5.3 LED display The two light emitting diodes indicates start/stop and running motor/machine. When a start command is

given either from the PPU, through the serial interface (option) or through the remote control inputs, the start/stop-LED will be illuminated.

At a stop command the start/stop-LED will switch off. When the motor is running, the running-LED is

flashing during ramp up and down and is illuminated continuously at full motor voltage.

Running-LED, flashing

StarUstop- LED, on

Running- LED, on

Running-LED, flashing

Start/stop- LED, off

Fig. 14 LED indication at different operation situation.

5.4 The Menu Structure The menus are organised in a simple one level structure with the possibility to limit the number of menus that are reachable by setting the value in menu 007 to "oFF" (factory setting). With this setting only the basic menus 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006 and 007 can be reached.

This to simplify the setting when only voltage start/ stop ramps are used.

If menu 007 is in "on" and menu 008 "oFF" it is possible to reach all viewing menus and alarm lists as well.

Key lock status 221

9,117.1 List

001II0loni2tilasItvaortItaragme

ramp RMS currents and voltages' 211-216 I in each phase I 003 'Step down voltage at stop

Viewed soft starter data' 201-208 I 0041 Stop ramp time

Reset to factory settings 1

199

Serial communication 1

111 -114

Automatic return menu 1 105

"JOG" enable 1103-104 i

Run at F1 &F4 alarm 1 101 -102

Machine protection 1 089 -099

005 RMS current

006 Control mode

Menu expander

Menu expander

Main supply protection 1 081 -0881

Motor protection 1 071 -075

061 I Parameter set

1 016 -018

1 020-025

1

030 -040

1 0/41 -046 'Nominal motor parameters

1 051 -052 'Relay K1 &K2 functions

) I

054-056 Analogue output

057-058 Digital input

Dual ramp start/stop

Initial and end torque at start

Main functions

Additional functions

03-F30

Fig. 15 Menu structure.

22 OPERATION OF THE SOFT STARTER

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 74 of 158

5.5 The keys The function of the keyboard are based on a few simple rules. At power up menu 001 is shown automatically. Use the "NEXT " and "PREV "keys to move between menus. To scroll through menu numbers, press and hold either the "NEXT " or the "PREV

" key. The "+" and "-" keys are used to increase respectively decrease the value of setting. The value is flashing during setting. The "ENTER " key con- firms the setting just made, and the value will go from flashing to stable. The "START/STOP" key is only used to start and stop the motor/machine. The F-7) and (Ri keys are only used for JOG from the keyboard. Please note one has to select enable in menu 103 or 104, see § 7.25, page 61.

Table 5 The keys

Start/stop motor operation. START STOP

Display previous menu. PREV

Display next menu.

. ...0.

NEXT

Decrease value of setting.

Increase value of setting.

Confirm setting just made. Alarm reset.

ENTER 4111 RESET

JOG Reverse

JOG Forward

Table 6 Control modes

5.6 Keyboard lock The keyboard can be locked to prohibit operation and parameter setting by an unauthorised. Lock keyboard by pressing both keys "NEXT " and "ENTER ...1" for at least 2 sec. The message '- Loc' will display

when locked. To unlock keyboard press the same 2 keys "NEXT 1 " and "ENTER .4..1 " for at least 2 sec. The message 'unlo' will display when unlocked.

In locked mode it is possible to view all parameters and read-out, but it is forbidden to set parameters and to operate the soft starter from the keyboard.

The message '-Loc' will display if trying to set a parameter or operate the soft starter in locked mode.

The key lock status can be read out in menu 221.

221 0°

no Locked keyboard info

Default: no

Range: no, YES

no Keyboard is not locked

YES Keyboard is locked

5.7 Overview of soft starter opera- tion and parameter set-up.

Table with the possibilities to operate and set para- meters in soft starter.

Control mode is selected in menu 006 and Parame- ter set is selected in menu 061. For the keyboard lock function, see § 7.30, page 65.

Operation/ Set-up

Control mode

Start/Stop JOG fwd/rev Alarm reset

Setting of parameters

Parameter set with external selection

Menu 061=0

Parameter set with internal selection

Menu 061=1-4

Keyboard Menu 006=1

Unlocked keyboard

Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard

Locked keyboard

Remote Menu 006=2

Unlocked keyboard

Remote Remote Remote and keyboard Remote Keyboard

Locked keyboard

Remote Remote Remote Remote

Serial comm. Menu 006=3

Unlocked keyboard

Serial comm Serial comm . Serial comm and keyboard Serial comm

Locked keyboard

Serial comm Serial comm Serial comm Serial comm

OPERATION OF THE SOFT STARTER 23

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 75 of 158

6. INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION

Mounting, wiring and setting the device into operation must be carried out by trained personnel (electricians specialised in heavy current technology):

In accordance with the local safety regulations of the electricity supply company. In accordance with DIN VDE 0100 for setting up heavy current plants.

Care must be taken to ensure that personnel do not come into contact with live circuit components.

WARNING! Never operate the soft starter with removed front cover.

6.1 Installation of the soft starter in a cabinet

When installing the soft starter: - Ensure that the cabinet will be sufficiently

ventilated, after the installation. - Keep the minimum free space, see the tables

on page 25. - Ensure that air can flow freely from the

bottom to the top.

NOTE! When installing the soft starter, make sure it does not come into contact with live components. The heat generated must be dispersed via the cooling fins to prevent damage to the thyristors (free circulation of air).

MSF-017 to MSF-835 soft starters are all delivered as

enclosed versions with front opening. The units have bottom entry for cables etc. see Fig. 25 on page 29 and Fig. 27 on page 31. MSF-1000 and MSF-1400 are delivered as open chassis.

NOTE! The soft starter should be wired with shielded con- trol cable to fulfill EMC regulations acc. to § 1.5, page 6.

NOTE! For UL-approval use 75°C Copper wire only.

MSF-017 to MSF-250

0 I

WI

Fig. 17 Hole pattern for MSF-017 to MSF-250 (backside view)

Fig. 16 MSF-017 to MSF-250 dimensions.

24 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION

Fig. 18 Hole pattern for MSF-170 to MSF-250 with upper mounting bracket instead of DIN-rail.

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 76 of 158

MSF-017 to MSF-250

Table 7 MSF-017 to MSF-250.

MSF model

Class Connection Cony./ Fan

Dimension HxWxD (mm)

Hole dist. w1 (mm)

Hole dist. h1 (mm)

Diam./ screw

Weight (kg)

-017, -030 IP 20 Busbars Convection 320x126x260 78.5 265 5.5/M5 6.7 -045, -060, -075, -085 IP 20 Busbars Fan 320x126x260 78.5 265 5.5/M5 6.9

-110, -145 IP 20 Busbars Fan 400x176x260 128.5 345 5.5/M5 12.0 -170, -210, -250 IP 20 Busbars Fan 500x260x260 208.5 445 5.5/M5 20

Table 8 MSF-017 to MSF-250

MSF model

Minimum

above 1)

free space

below

(mm):

at side

Dimension Connection busbars Cu

lightening torque for bolt (Nm)

Cable PE-cable Supply and PE

-017, -030, -045 100 100 0 15x4 (M6), PE (M6) 8 8 0.6 -060, -075, -085 100 100 0 15x4 (M8), PE (M6) 12 8 0.6 -110,-145 100 100 0 20x4 (M10), PE (M8) 20 12 0.6 -170, -210, -250 100 100 0 30x4 (M10), PE (M8) 20 12 0.6 1) Above: wall-soft starter or soft starter-soft starter

MSF-310 to MSF-1400

Table 9 MSF-310 to MSF-1400 see Fig. 20 on page 26.

MSF model

Class Connection Conv./ Fan

Dimension HxWxD (mm)

Hole dist. w1 (mm)

Hole dist. hl (mm)

Diam./ screw

Weight (kg)

-310 IP 20 Busbars Fan 532x547x278 460 450 8.5/M8 42 -370, -450 IP 20 Busbars Fan 532x547x278 460 450 8.5/M8 46 -570 IP 20 Busbars Fan 687x640x302 550 600 8.5/M8 64 -710 IP 20 Busbars Fan 687x640x302 550 600 8.5/M8 78 -835 IP 20 Busbars Fan 687x640x302 550 600 8.5/M8 80 -1000, -1400 'POO Busbar Fan 900x875x336 Fig 23 8.5/M8 175

Table 10 MSF-310 to MSF-1400.

MSF model

Minimum free space (mm): Dimension Connection, busbars Al

Tightening torque for bolt (Nm)

above 1) below at side Cable PE-cable Supply and PE

-310, -370, -450 -570, -710, -835

-1000, -1400

100 100 100

100 100 100

0

0

100

40x8 (M12) 40x10 (M12) 75x10 (M12)

50 50 50

12 12 12

0.6 0.6 0.6

1) Above: Wall-soft starter or soft starter-soft starter

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 25

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 77 of 158

Fig. 19 MSF -310 to MSF -835.

Fig 20 Hole pattern for screw attachment, MSF-310 to

MSF-835. Hole distance (mm).

26 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION

MSF e f

-310 to -450 44 39 -570 to -835 45.5 39

Observe that the two supplied mounting hooks (see § 1.8, page 7 and Fig. 2 on page 7 must be used for mounting the soft starter as upper support (only MSF- 310 to MSF-835).

0 0

3

W3 W2 W1

h1

Fig. 21 Busbar distances MSF -310 to MSF -835.

Table 11 Busbar distances

MSF model Dist. hi (mm)

Dist. wl (mm)

Dist. w2 (mm)

Dist. w3 (mm)

-310 to -450

-570 to -835

-1000 -1400

104

129

33

35

55

206

239.5

322.5

379

444

590.5

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 78 of 158

0

Fig. 22 MSF -1000 to -1400

825

0

0

0

0

590.5 322.5

03-F13

Fig. 23 Hole pattern busbar MSF -1000 to -1400.

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 27

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 79 of 158

6.2 Connections

0

3 2

IA D C

O 0 0000 0000 0 0 D 0000 C 0000

O 0-11

03-F54_1

O

1 4

0 0

n7innFirr'' Qmiww_FrowE:

1313012121130

Mr, 101W1 :IA

NM POO ,11

wr-limo T1111"1 T2 -

CO .1 L2

T3

Eal

0 0

Fig. 24 Connection of MSF-017 to MSF -085.

Connection of MSF-017 to MSF-085

Device connections 1. Protective earth, (PE), Mains supply, Motor

(on the right and left inside of the cabinet) 2. Protective earth, --i- (PE), Control voltage 3. Control voltage connection 01, 02

4. Mains supply Ll, L2, 1.3

5. Motor power supply T1, T2, T3 6. Current transformers (possible to mount outside

for bypass see § 7.12, page 43) 7. Mounting of EMC gland for control cables

28 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 80 of 158

Fig. 25 Connection of MSF-110 to MSF-145.

Connection of MSF-110 to MSF-145

Device connections 1. Protective earth, I- (PE), Mains supply, Motor

(on the left inside of the cabinet) 2. Protective earth 1- (PE), Control voltage 3. Control voltage connection 01, 02 4. Mains supply Li, L2, L3 5. Motor power supply Ti, T2, T3 6. Current transformers (possible to mount outside

for bypass see § 7.12, page 43) 7. Mounting of EMC gland for control cables

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 29

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 81 of 158

111 111111; MIN I ROA MINIMININI 111111111111211111111M111111111

IIMIUMI111.11111 111.111...1

03-F104

Fig. 26 Connection of MSF-170 to MSF-250

Connection of MSF-170 to MSF-250

Device connections 1. Protective earth, 1 (PE), Mains supply, Motor

(on the left inside of the cabinet) 2. Protective earth L (PE), Control voltage 3. Control voltage connection 01, 02 4. Mains supply Li, L2, L3 5. Motor power supply T1, T2, T3 6. Current transformers (possible to mount outside

for bypass see § 7.12, page 43) 7. Mounting of EMC gland for control cables

30 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 82 of 158

Fig. 27 Connection of MSF-170 to MSF-1400.

Connection of MSF-310 to MSF-1400

Device connections 1. Protective earth, J- (PE), Mains supply and

Motor 2. Protective earth, 4_ (PE), Control voltage 3. Control voltage connection 01, 02

4. Mains supply Li, 12, L3 5. Motor power supply Ti, T2, T3

6. Current transformers (possible to mount outside

for bypass see § 7.12, page 43)

7. Mounting of EMC gland for control cables

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 31

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 83 of 158

6.3 Connection and setting on the PCB control card

Fig. 28 Connections on the PCB, control card.

Table 12 PCB Terminals

Terminal Function Electrical characteristics 01

Supply voltage 100-240 VAC t10%/380-500 VAC t 10% 02 PE Gnd 1- 11

Digital inputs for start/stop and reset. 0-3 V -> 0; 8-27 V-> 1. Max. 37 V for 10 sec. Impedance to 0 VDC: 2.2 ka 12

13 Supply/control voltage to PCB terminal 11 and 12, 10 kfl potentiometer, etc.

+12 VDC t5%. Max. current from +12 VDC: 50mA. Short circuit proof.

14 Remote analogue input control, 0-10 V, 2-10 V, 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA /digital input.

Impedance to terminal 15 (0 VDC) voltage signal: 125 K2, current signal: 100 Si

15 GND (common) 0 VDC

16 Digital inputs for selection of parameter set.

0-3 V -> 0; 8-27 V-> 1. Max. 37 V for 10 sec. Imped- ance to 0 VDC: 2.2 ka 17

18 Supply/control voltage to PCB terminal 16 and 17, 10 lin potentiometer, etc.

+12 VDC t5%. Max. current from +12 VDC = 50mA. Short circuit proof.

19 Remote analogue output control Analogue Output contact: 0-10V, 2-10V; min load impedance 70051 0-20mA and 4-20mA;max load impedance 75051

21 Programmable relay Kl. Factory setting is "Opera- tion indication by closing terminal 21- 22.

1-pole closing contact, 250 VAC 8A or 24 VDC 8A resistive, 250 VAC, 3A inductive. 22

23 Programmable relay K2. Factory setting is "Full volt- age" indication by closing terminal 23-24.

1-pole closing contact, 250 VAC 8A or 24 VDC 8A resistive, 250 VAC, 3A inductive. 24

31 Alarm relay K3, closed to 33 at alarm. 1-pole change over contact, 250 VAC 8A or 24 VDC 8A resistive, 250 VAC, 3A inductive. 32 Alarm relay K3, opened at alarm.

33 Alarm relay K3, common terminal.

69-70 PTC Thermistor input Alarm level 2.4 kil Switch back level 2.2 kn.

71-72* Clickson thermistor Controlling soft starter cooling fine temperature MSF-310 - MSF -1400

73-74* NTC thermistor Temperature measuring of soft starter cooling fine

75 Current transformer input, cable S1 (blue) Connection of L1 or T1 phase current transformer

76 Current transformer input, cable S1 (blue) Connection of L3, T3 phase (MSF 017 - MSF 250) or L2, T2 phase (MSF 310 - MSF 1400)

77 Current transformer input, cable S2 (brown) Common connection for terminal 75 and 76

78* Fan connection 24 VDC

79* Fan connection 0 VDC

*Internal connection, no customer use.

32 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 84 of 158

6.4 Minimum wiring

IJ. L2 1.3 PE

0

1011240 - +10%

PE

L1 L2 L3 PE 01 02 PE 21bK1 22 23_(2 N 33k3j 2 69 70

T1 T2 T3 PE 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 75 76 77

start /stop

_ _ _ _

V w PE

03-F25

Fig. 29 Wiring circuit, "Minimum wiring".

The figure above shows the "minimum wiring". See § 6.1, page 24, for tightening torque for bolts etc. 1. Connect Protective Earth (PE) to earth screw

marked (PE). 2. Connect the soft starter between the 3-phase mains

supply and the motor. On the soft starter the mains side is marked Ll, L2 and L3 and the motor side with T1, T2 and T3.

3. Connect the control voltage (100-240 VAC) for the control card at terminal 01 and 02.

4. Connect relay K1 (terminals 21 and 22) to the con- trol circuit.

5. Connect PCB terminal 12 and 13 (PCB terminal 11-12 must be linked) to, e.g. a 2-position switch (on/oFF) or a PLC, etc., to obtain control of soft start/stop. (For start/stop command from keyboard menu 006 must be set to 01).

6. Ensure the installation complies with the appropri- ate local regulations.

NOTE! The soft starter should be wired with shielded control cable to fulfill EMC regulations acc. to § 1.5, page 6.

NOTE! If local regulations say that a mains contactor should be used, the Kl then controls It. Always use standard commercial, slow blow fuses, e.g. type gi, gG to protect the wiring and prevent short circuiting. To protect the thydstors against short- circuit currents, superfast semiconductor fuses can be used if preferred. The normal guarantee is valid even if superfast semiconductor fuses are not used. All signal inputs and

outputs are galvanically insulated from the mains supply.

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 33

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 85 of 158

6.5 Wiring examples Fig. 30 gives an wiring example with the following functions.

Analogue input control, see § 7.7, page 40 Parameter set selection, see § 7.20, page 54 Analogue output, see § 7.18, page 52 PTC input, see § 7.21, page 55

For more information see § 6.3, page 32.

11

L2

L3

PE

LI 12 L3 PE 0102 PE 2 22

TI T2 T3 PE

PTC

11 12 13

start /stop

23L 24 33k3j 1 69 70

14 15 16 17 18 19 75 76 77

PS2

PSI

Analogue in + Analogue out O 10V

2 10V

O 20nA 4 2OmA

Parameter set PS1 PS2

open open

2 closed open

3 open closed

4 closed closed

03-F18

Fig. 30 Analogue input control, parameter set, analogue output and PTC input.

Fig. 31 Forward /reverse wiring circuit.

34 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 86 of 158

7. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU

This chapter describes all the parameters and functions in numerical order as they appear in the MSE Table 13 gives an overview of the menus, see also Chapter 13. page 79 (set-up menu list).

Table 13 Set-up Menu overview

Menu number Parameter group Menu numbers See §

Basic functions 001-008 Basic

Ramp up/down parameters 001-005 7.1 Start/Stop/Reset command 006 7.2 Menu Expansion 007-008 7.3

Extended functions 011-199

Voltage control dual ramp 011-014 7.4 Torque control parameters 016-018 7.5 Main functions 020-025 7.6 - 7.10 Additional functions 030-036 7.11 - 7.14

Slow speed and Jog functions 037-040, 57-58, 103-104

7.15, 7.19, 7.25

Motor Data Setting 041-046 7.16

Outputs Relays 051-052 7.17 Analogue output 054-056 7.18

Input Digital input 057-058 7.19 Parameter set selection 061 7.20

Motor protection 071-075 7.21 Main protection 081-088 7.22 Application protection 089-099 7.23 Resume alarms 101, 102 7.24

Auto return menu 105 7.26 Factory defaults 199 7.28

View functions 201-915

Main view 201-208 7.29 RMS current per phase 211-213 7.29 RMS voltage per phase 214-216 7.29 Keyboard lock status 221 7.30 Alarm list 901-915 7.31

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU 35

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 87 of 158

7.1 Ramp up/down parameters

Fig. 32 Menu numbers for start/stop ramps, initial voltage at start and step down voltage at stop.

Determine the starting time for the motor/machine. When setting the ramp times for starting and stopping, initial voltage at start and step down voltage at stop, proceed as follow:

001 o

3 0 Setting the initial voltage at start ramp 1

Default: 30%

Range: 25 - 90% Un

Set the initial voltage. Normally the factory setting, 30% of Un, is a suitable choice.

002 ( Do

10 Setting of start ramp 1

Default: 10 sec

Range: 1-60 sec

Set "Ramp up time" at start.

003°°

1 0 0 Setting of step down voltage stop ramp 1

Default: 100%

Range: 100-40% of Un

Step down vo tage at stop can be used to stop smoothly.

36 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU

004°°

o F

Setting of stop ramp 1

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 2-120 sec

oFF Stop ramp disabled

2-120 Set 'Tamp down time" at stop

7.1.1 RMS current [005]

0 0 5 °0

0. 0 RMS current

Default:

Range: 0.0-9999Amp

Read-out of the RMS motor current.

NOTE! This is the same read-out as function 201, see § 7.28, page 63.

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 88 of 158

7.2 Start/stop/reset command Start/stop of the motor and reset of alarm is done either from the keyboard, through the remote control inputs or through the serial interface (option). The remote control inputs start/stop/reset (PCB terminals 11, 12 and 13) can be connected for 2-wire or 3-wire control.

0 6 °0

2 Selection of control mode

Default: 2

Range: 1,2,3

1

START/STOP/RESET command via the keyboard. - Press the "START/STOP" key on the keyboard to start and stop the soft starter.

- Press "ENTER/RESET" key to reset a trip condition.

2

Via Remote control. START/STOP/ RESET commands. The following control methods are possible: - 2-wire start/stop with automatic

reset, see § 7.2.1, page 37. - 2-wire start/stop with separate

reset, see § 7.2.2, page 37. - 3-wire start/stop with automatic

reset at start, see § 7.2.3, page 37.

WARNING! The motor will start if terminals 11, 12, 13 is In start position.

3

START/STOP/RESET commands via serial interface option. Read the operating instruction supplied with this option.

NOTE! A reset via the keyboard will not start or stop the motor.

NOTE! Factory default setting is 2, remote control.

To start and stop from the keyboard, the "START/ STOP" key is used.

To reset from the keyboard, the "ENTER .4_1 / RESET" key is used. A reset can be given both when the motor is running and when the motor is stopped. A reset from the keyboard will not start or stop the motor.

' 4

7.2.1 2-wire start/stop with automatic reset at start

Closing PCB terminals 12 and 13, and a jumper between terminal 11 and 12, will give a start com- mand. Opening the terminals will give a stop. If PCB terminals 12 and 13 is closed at power up a start com- mand is given (automatic start at power up). When a start command is given there will automatically be a reset.

7.2.2 2-wire start/stop with separate reset

Closing PCB terminals 11, 12 and 13 will give a start and opening the terminals 12 and 13 will give a stop. If PCB terminals 12 and 13 are closed at power up a start command is given (automatic start at power up). When PCB terminals 11 and 13 are opened and closed again a reset is given. A reset can be given both when the motor is running and stopped and doesn't affect the start/stop.

7.2.3 3-wire start/stop with automatic reset at start.

rzyrvrIt-Lr--2"ry rillfflagnETIMMI tIntnrirlittierlet30iiii)cr;IMIT3111

W.171DOCILD1-260 imiatakialatitala

PCB terminal 12 and 13 are normally closed and PCB terminal 11 and 13 are normally open. A start com- mand is given by momentarily closing PCB terminal 11 and 13. To stop, PCB terminal 12 and 13 are momentarily opened.

When a start command is given there will automat- ically be a reset. There will not be an automatic start at power up.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU 37

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 89 of 158

7.3 Menu expansion setting. In order to use the viewing menus and/or the extended functions menu 007 must be set to "On", then one reach read out of the viewing menus 201- 915. To be able to set any extended functions in the menus 011-199 menu 008 must be set to "on" as well.

0 0 7 ° o

Selecting

O F F

of extended functions and viewing functions

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, on

oFF Only function 1-7 are visible

on - View functions 201-915 are visible - Extended functions (menu 008) selectable

00 8°° 0

o F F

Selecting of extended functions

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, on

oFF Only view function 201-915 are visi- ble.

on All the function menus are visible

NOTE! Menu 007 must be "on".

7.4 Voltage control dual ramp To achieve even smoother ramps at start and or stop, a

dual ramp can be used.

Fig 33 Menu numbers for dual voltage ramp at start/stop, initial voltage at start and step down-voltage at stop.

The settings are carried out by beginning with the set- tings in menus 001-004 and 007-008 and proceed with the following steps:

38 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU

011 Cl0

9 0 Setting the initial voltage at start ramp 2

Default: 90%

Range: 30-90% Un

Set the start voltage for start ramp 2. The initial voltage for start ramp 2 is limited to the initial volt- age at start (menu 001), see § 7.1, page 36.

0 1 2 °0

o F F

Setting of start ramp 2

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1-60 sec

oFF Start ramp 2 disabled

1-60 Set the start ramp 2 time. A dual voltage ramp is active.

0130

4 0 Setting of step down voltage in stop ramp 2

Default: 40%

Range: 100-40% Un

Set the step down voltage for stop ramp 2. The step down voltage for stop ramp 2 is limited to the step down voltage at stop (menu 003).

0 1 4 °0

o F F

Setting of stop ramp time 2

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 2-120 sec

oFF Stop ramp 2 disabled

1-60 Set the stop ramp 2 time. A dual voltage stop ramp is active.

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 90 of 158

(11)-.

7.5 Torque control parameters 7.6 Current limit (Main Function) See also § 7.10, page 42 and chapter 4. page 13 for The Current Limit function is used to limit the current more information on the Torque control setting. drawn when starting (150 - 500% of In). This means

that current limit is only achieved during set start-up time. 0 1 6 ° o

10 Initial torque at start

Default: 10

Range: 0 - 250% of Tn

Insert initial torque at start in percent of nominal shaft torque (Tn), see chapter 13. page 79.

017 ° o

End

1 5 0 torque at start

Default: 150

Range: 50 - 250% of Tn

Insert end torque at start in percent of nominal shaft torque.

0180 ,

0 End torque at stop

Default: 0

Range: 0 - 100% of Tn

Insert end torque at stop in percent of the nominal motor torque.

Two kinds of current limit starts are available. Voltage ramp with a limited current. If current is below set current limit, this start will act exactly as a voltage ramp start. Current limit start. The soft starter will control the current up to set current limit immediately at start, and keep it there until the start is completed or the set start-up time expires.

See Fig. 34 Current limit.

NOTE! Make sure that nominal motor current In menu 042 Is correctly inserted.

7.6.1 Voltage ramp with current limit The settings are carried out in three steps: 1. Estimate starting-time for the motor/machine and

select that time in menu 002 (see § 7.1, page 36). 2. Estimate the initial voltage and select this voltage in

menu 001 (see § 7.1, page 36). 3. Set the current limit to a suitable value e.g. 300% of

In in menu 020.

2 0 °o

Voltage ramp with current

o F F limit at start

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 150 - 500% In

oFF Voltage Ramp mode with current limit disabled. Voltage Ramp ena- bled.

150-500 Current limit level in Voltage ramp mode.

NOTE! Only possible when Voltage Ramp mode is enabled. Menus 021-025 must be "oFF".

Current

Current limit at start

g Voltage ramp

Time

03-F109

Fig. 34 Current limit

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU 39

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 91 of 158

7.6.2 Current limit The settings are carried out in two steps: 1. Estimate starting time for the motor/machine and

select that time in menu 002 (see § 7.1, page 36). 2. Set the current limit to a suitable value e.g. 300% of

In in menu 021.

021 °0

o F F

Current limit at start

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 150 - 500% In

oFF Current limit mode disabled. Voltage Ramp enabled.

150-500 Current limit level in current limit mode.

NOTE! Only possible when Voltage Ramp mode is enabled. Menus 020, 022-025 must be "oFF".

NOTE! Even though the current limit can be set as low as 150% of the nominal motor current value, this minimum value cannot be used generally. Considerations must be given to the starting torque and the motor before setting the appropriate current limft. "Real start time" can be longer or shorter than the set values depending on the load conditions. This applies to both current limit methods.

Current

Current Limit

FLC

Starting time Time 03-F110

Fig. 35 Current limit

If the starting time is exceeded and the soft starter is

still operating at current level, an alarm will be acti- vated. It is possible to let the soft starter to either stop operation or to continue. Note that the current will rise uncontrolled if the operation continues (see §

7.24.2, page 61).

40 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU

7.7 Pump control (Main Function) By choosing pump control you will automatically get a stop ramp set to 15 sec. The optimising parameters for this main function are start and stop time; initial torque at start and end torque at start and stop. End torque at stop is used to let go of the pump when it's no longer producing pressure/flow, which can vary on different pumps. See Fig. 36.

Fig. 36 Pump control

Pump application The pump application is using Torque ramps for quad- ratic load. This gives lowest possible current and linear start and stop ramps. Related menus are 2, 4 (see § 7.1, page 36), 16, 17 and 18 (see § 7.5, page 39).

022°°

o F F

Setting of pump control

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, on

oFF Pump control disabled. Voltage Ramp enabled.

on Pump control application is enabled.

NOTE! Only possible when Voltage Ramp mode is enabled. Menu 020-021, 023-025 must be "oFF".

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 92 of 158

7.8 Analogue Input Control (Main Function)

Soft starting and soft stopping can also be controlled via the Analogue Input Control (0-10 V, 2-10 V, 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA). This control makes it possible to con- nect optional ramp generators or regulators.

After the start command, the motor voltage is con- trolled through the remote analogue input.

WARNING! The remote analogue control may not be used for continuous speed regulation of stand- ard motors. With this type of operation the in-

crease In the temperature of the motor must be taken Into consideration.

To install the analogue input control, proceed by: 1. Connect the ramp generator or regulator to termi-

nal 14 (+) and 15 (-).

Fig. 37 Wiring for analogue input.

2. Set Jumper J1 on the PCB control card to voltage (U) or current control (I) signal position, see Fig. 38 and Fig. 24 on page 28. Factory setting is voltage

J1

,111. MM. rarinnrar , rzi E rs-1 Es1C.< s. Cs9 C.: 01111MEPINIMN

-13] Mk" Eel_ (1313Cit11303 IZEIMMIMEICItin

03F53

0

9

Fig. 38 Setting voltage or current for analogue input.

2 3 °0

input

o F F

Selection of Analogue control

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1, 2

oFF Analogue input disabled. Voltage Ramp enabled.

1 Analogue input is set for 0-10V/ 0-20mA control signal

2 Analogue input is set for 2-10V/ 4-20mA control signal.

NOTE! Only possible when Voltage Ramp mode is enabled. Menu 020-022, 024, 025 must be "oFF'

7.9 Full voltage start, D.O.L. (Main Function)

The motor can be accelerated as if it was connected directly to the mains. For this type of operation:

Check whether the motor can accelerate the required load (D.O.L.-start, Direct On Line start). This function can be used even with shorted thyristors.

0 2 4 ° 0

o F F

Setting of D.O.L start

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, on

oFF D.O.L. start disabled. Voltage Ramp enabled.

on D.O.L. start enabled

NOTE! Only possible when Voltage Ramp mode is enabled. Menu 020-023, 025 must be "oFF".

Fig. 39 Full voltage start.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU 41

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 93 of 158

7.10 Torque control (Main function) This main function can be used to make a start accord- ing to a pre -defined torque reference curve. Two dif- ferent load characteristics, linear and square, are possible to select.

At start/stop the torque controller will follow the selected characteristic.

A torque start/stop behaviour can be seen in Fig. 40.

A perfect start and stop with torque ramps have a good linearity of current. To optimise this, use the set- ting of initial torque (menu 16) and end torque (menu 18). See also § 7.5, page 39.

Example: Default for initial torque is 10% so if starting a more heavy load this will result in a small current peak in beginning of ramp. By increasing this value to 30/ 70% the current peak will not appear.

The end torque is increased mainly if the applica- tion has a high inertial load, like planers, saws and centrifuges. A current peak will appear in the end of ramp because the load is pushing the speed more or less by itself. By increasing this level to 150-250% the current will be linear and low.

0250

o F F

Torque control at start/stop

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1, 2

oFF Torque control is disabled Voltage Ramp enabled.

1 Torque control with linear torque characteristic

2 Torque control with square torque characteristic

NOTE! Torque control mode is only possible when Voltage Ramp mode is enabled (menu 020-024 are "oFF").

2.5 Tr,

2 Tn

1.5 In

Tn

0.5 Tn

Torque

1 Linear

2 Square End torque

Nominal Torque

Initial torque End torque at stop

Time

03-F37

Start time Stop time

Fig. 40 Torque control at start/stop.

Fig. 41 Current and speed in torque control.

42 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 94 of 158

7.11 Torque boost The Torque Booster enables a high torque to be obtained by providing a high current during 0.1 -2 sec at start. This enables a soft start of the motor even if the break away torque is high at start. For example in crushing mills applications etc.

When the torque booster function has finished, starting continues according to the selected start mode.

Torque boost Current limit -

Full speed Load current -

03-F40 Time

Fig. 42 The principle of the Torque Booster when starting the motor in voltage ramp mode.

See § 4.6, page 19, which main function that can be used with the torque boost.

0 0 0

boost time

o F F

Torque active

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 0.1 - 2 sec

oFF Torque boost disabled

0.1-2.0 Set the Torque boost time.

031 ° 0

limit

3 0 0 Torque boost current

Default: 300

Range: 300 - 700% of In

The Torque boost current controller use selected value as the motor current reference.

NOTE! Check whether the motor can accelerate the load with "Torque booster", without any harmful mechanical stress.

7.12 Bypass In cases of high ambient temperatures or other reason it may sometimes be necessary to use a by-pass contactor to minimize the power loss at nominal speed (see Tech- nical Data). By using the built-in Full Voltage Relay function an external contactor can be used to Bypass the soft starter when operating at nominal speed.

Bypass contactor can also be used if soft stop is required. Normally a Bypass contactor is not necessary as the device is designed for continues running condi- tions, see Fig. 29 on page 33 for wiring example.

NOTE! If one like to use the alarm functions, the extended functions or the viewing functions the 2-pcs current transformers must be mounted outside the soft start as shown in Fig. 44 and Fig. 45 on page 45. For this purpose an optional extension cable for the current transformers is available. Code No 01-2020-00.

032 0 o

o F F

Setting of Bypass

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, on

oFF Bypass disabled

on

Bypass enabled. Program either relay K1 or K2 to function 2 to control the bypass con- tactor, see menu 51/52.

CAUTION! If the current transformers are not mounted as in Fig. 43 on page 44 and § 6.2, page 28, the alarm and viewing functions will not work. Do not forget to set menu 032 to ON, otherwise there will be an F12 alarm and at the stop command will be a freewheeling stop.

For further information see chapter 6.2 page 28.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU 43

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 95 of 158

L1

L2

L3

N

0

L1 L2 L3 PE 01 02 PE 21L" 22 23

T1 12 T3 PE -

24 331 311 32

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

start /slop

T1 /3 PE

Current transformer position and connection

For MSF-017 to MSF-250, see Fig. 44.

For MSF-310 to MSF-1400, see Fig. 45.

69 70

75 76 77

O w PE

03-F19

Fig 43 Bypass wiring example MSF 310-1400.

44 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 96 of 158

T1

Brown to terminal 77

SOFTSTARTER

Blue to terminal 75

12 T3

Brown to terminal 77

Blue to terminal 76

V

MOTOR 03-F56

Fig 44 Current transformer position when Bypass MSF-017 to MSF-250.

T1

Brown to terminal 77

SOFTSTARTER

Brown to terminal 77

T2

Blue to terminal 75

U

Blue to terminal 76

MOTOR

V

T3

w

03-F57

Fig. 45 Current transformer position when Bypass MSF-310 to MSF-1400.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU 45

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 97 of 158

7.13 Power Factor Control During operation, the soft starter continuously moni- tors the load on the motor. Particularly when idling or when only partially loaded, it is sometimes desirable to improve the power factor. If Power factor control (PFC) is selected, the soft starter reduces the motor voltage when the load is lower. Power consumption is reduced and the degree of efficiency improved.

033

o F F

Setting of PFC

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, on

oFF PFC disabled

on PFC enabled. The Full voltage relay function does not work.

41, NOTE! If the PFC Is used the EMC-directive is not fulfilled.

7.14 Brake functions There are two built in braking methods for applications were the normal stop ramp is not enough.

Dynamic DC-brake Increases the braking torque by decreasing speed. Soft brake Gives a high torque at the start of the braking and then also increasing torque by decreasing speed.

In both methods the MSF detects when the motor is

standing still, so rotating in wrong direction is avoided.

Dynamic Vector Brake Possible to stop motors with high inertia loads from close to synchronous speed. At 70% of the nominal speed a DC-brake is acti- vated until the motor is standing still or the selected Braking Time has expired (see menu 34, next page). No contactor needed. For extra safety, the soft starter has a digital input signal for monitoring standstill so that at real motor standstill will stop the output voltage immediately (see § 7.19, page 53).

Soft brake Even very high inertia loads can be stopped The Soft brake is a controlled reversing of the motor as the MSF measures the speed during brak- ing. Two contactors are needed which can be placed on the in- or output of the soft starter. On the input the first contactor is connected to relay K1 which is

also used as a mains contactor. At 30% of the nominal speed a DC-brake is acti- vated until the motor is standing still or the selected Braking Time has expired (menu 34, next page).

46 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU

For extra safety, the soft starter has a digital input signal for monitoring standstill. So that the output voltage is stopped immediately (see menu 57-58, § 7.19, page 53).

See Fig. 47 on page 47 for the following set-up sequence:

Soft brake is activated if menu 36=2 and menu 34 has a time selected (see next page). Menu 51 and 52 are automatically set to 5 and 4 to get the correct relay functions on K1 and K2 (see § 7.17, page 51). Relay K1 should be used to connect a contactor for supply Ll, L2, L3 to MSF or motor. Relay K2 is used to connect phase shifting contac- tor to change Ll, L2 and L3 to MSF or motor. At start K1 is activated and connects Ll, L2, L3 then the motor starts. At stop K1 opens and discon- nects Ll, L2, and L3 and after is K2 connects with the other phase sequence and the braking of the motor is active.

NOTE! Soft brake uses both programmable relays. For other functions, see also the function table in chapter 7. page 35.

NOTE! For several start/stops ft is recommend to use the PTC Input.

WARNING! If the Soft Brake function has been selected once and after that the Bypass function is selected, then the relay functions on K1 and K2 remain in the Soft Brake functionality. Therefore it

is necessary to change the relay functions in menu 51-52 manually to the Bypass functions (see § 7.17, page 51) or reset to default In menu 199 (see § 7.28, page 63) and select the Bypass function again.

034ro

o F F

Braking time

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1- 120 sec

oFF Brake function disabled

1-120 Brake time

Fig. 46 Braking time

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 98 of 158

0 3 5 0 0

1 0 0 Braking Strength

Default: 100

Range: 100 - 500%

0 3 6 ° o

1 Brake method

Default: 1

Range: 1, 2

1 Dynamic vector brake, active

2 Soft brake active

Li 1.2

L3

N

PE

%

Q1 fwd)

Q2 rev)

Li 1.2 L3 PE 01 02 PE 21 --......._)

K122 23L 24

T1 T2 T3 PE

- - 33 K3 32 K3 69 70

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 75 76 77

v

it PE

1 .7;1-.- 0 start /stop

03-F106

Fig. 47 Soft brake wiring example.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU 47

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 99 of 158

7.15 Slow speed and Jog functions The soft starter is able to run the motor at a fixed slow speed for a limited period of time.

The slow speed will be about 14% of the full speed in the forward direction and 9% in the reverse direc- tion.

The following functions are possible: Slow speed controlled by an external signal. The digital input is used to run at slow speed at a

start or stop command for a selected number of pulses (edges) generated by an external sensor (photo cell, micro switch, etc.). See § 7.19, page 53 for more instructions. Slow Speed during a selected time period. The slow speed will be active after a stop command for a selected time period. See § 7.19, page 53 for more instructions. Slow Speed using the "JOG"-commands. The slow Speed can be activated via the JOG keys on the keyboard or externally via the analogue input. See § 7.25, page 61 for more instructions.

7.15.1 Slow speed controlled by an external signal.

With these setting it is possible to have an external pulse or edge signal controlling the time that the Slow Speed is active either after a Start command or a Stop command or at both commands. The following menu's are involved:

Menu Function See page

57 Digital input selection page 53

58 Pulse selection page 53

37 Slow speed torque page 49

38 Slow speed time at start page 49

39 Slow speed time at stop page 49

40 DC-Brake at slow speed page 49

Installation is as follows: 1. Set the analogue input selection for Slow Speed

operation. Menu 57=2. See § 7.19, page 53. See Fig. 37 on page 41 for a wiring example.

2. Select in menu 38 (see § 7.15.2, page 49) the Slow Speed at Start time. This time will now be the abso- lute maximum time for Slow Speed to be active after a start command, in case the external signal will not appear.

3. Select in menu 39 (see § 7.15.2, page 49) the Slow Speed at Stop time. This time will now be the abso- lute maximum time for Slow Speed to be active after a stop command, in case the external signal will not appear.

4. Select in menu 57 (see § 7.19, page 53) the number of edges to be ignored by the Slow Speed input, before a start or stop is executed at slow speed. The edges are generated by an external sensor (photo cell, micro switch, etc.).

48 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU

The Slow Speed torque (menu 37) and DC-Brake after Slow Speed (menu 40) can be selected if needed. (see § 7.15.4, page 49).

When the number of edges exceeds or the time expire, a start according to selected main function is made.

At stop, the motor will ramp down (if selected) and DC brake (if selected) before a slow speed forward at stop will begin. Slow speed will last as long as the number of edges on the external input is below param- eter value in menu 036 and the max duration time doesn't expires. When the number of edges exceeds or the time expire, a stop is made.

In Fig. 48 on page 48 the selected number of edges are 4. It is recommended to select DC-brake (se § 7.14, page 46) before a slow speed at stop if it is a high inertia load. See Fig. 29 on page 33 for wiring diagram. In case one use DC-brake, see § 7.15.4, page 49.

Speed

nN

0.14 nN Slow

speed at start

Start command

External Open signal

Closed

Ramp time at start

Full voltage running

Ramp time' Slow at stop speed including DCbrake time

Time when signal is ignored

at stop Stopped

Time

03-F44

Fig. 48 Slow speed controlled by an external signal.

This additional function can be used together with most of the main functions (see § 4.6, page 19).

0370

10 Slow speed torque

Default: 10

Range: 10-100

Select the magnitude of the slow speed torque.

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 100 of 158

7.15.2 Slow speed during a selected time It is possible to have a slow speed in forward direction before a start and after a stop. The duration of the slow speed is selectable in menus 038 and 039.

It is recommended to select DC brake (see § 7.14, page 46) before a slow speed at stop if it is a high inertia load. This slow speed function is possible in all control modes, keyboard, remote and serial communication.

0 3 6 °0

of Slow speed time at start

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1- 60 sec

oFF Slow speed at start is disabled

1-60 Set slow speed time at start.

0390

o F F

Slow speed time at stop

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1- 60 sec

oFF Slow speed at stop is disabled

1-60 Set slow speed time at stop.

Nominal speed

0.14 .nN

03-F41

Slow speed

Slow speed lat start

Start command

Ramp time at Full voltage Ramp time Slow speed start running stop in at stop

lading bbrrake time

Stop command Stopped

Fig. 49 Slow speed at start/stop during a selected time.

The Slow speed torque (menu 37) and the DC-Brake after Slow speed (menu 40, § 7.15.4, page 49) can be selected if needed.

7.15.3 Jog Functions The Jog commands can be used to let the motor run at a Slow speed (forward or reverse) as long as the Jog command is active.

The Jog commands can be activated in 2 different ways:

Jog keys The Jog-Forward and Jog-reverse keys on the con- trol panel. The keys can be programmed separate for each function. See § 7.25, page 61 for more instructions External Jog command The external command is given via terminal 14 at the digital input. Only 1 function (forward or reverse) can be programmed to the digital input at the time. See § 7.19, page 53 for more instructions.

7.15.4 DC-brake after slow speed at stop [040] A DC-brake after a sloW speed at stop is possible to have, i.e. for a high inertia load or for a precise stop.

The current is controlled and the reference value for the normal DC-brake function is used (see § 7.15.4, page 49). The duration for the DC-brake is possible to select.

This DC-brake function is not applied when the "JOG In " and "JOG 0." keys are used.

040 g

o F F

DC-Brake at slow speed

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1-60

oFF DC-brake after slow speed at stop disabled.

1-60 DC-brake duration time after slow speed at stop.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU 49

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 101 of 158

7.16 Motor data setting The first step in the settings is to set menu 007 and 008 to "on" to be able to reach the menus 041-046 and enter the motor data.

NOTE! The default factory settings are for a standard 4-pole motor acc. to the nominal current and power of the soft starter. The soft starter will run even if no specific motor data is selected, but the performance will not be optimal.

4 1 10 o

4 0 0 Nominal motor voltage

Default: 400 V

Range: 200-700 V

Make sure the soft starters maximum voltage rat- ing is suitable for chosen motor voltage.

0 4 2 0 0

1 7 Nominal motor current

Default: Nominal soft starter current Range: 25% - 150% of Insoft in Amp.

0 4 3 0 0

7. 5 Nominal motor power

Default: Nominal soft starter power

Range: 25% - 300% of Pnsoft in kW

4 4 0 0

i. 4 5 Nominal motor speed

Default: Nnsoft in rpm

Range: 500-3600 rpm

50 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU

014 5 0 0

0. 8 6 Nominal motor cos phi

Default: 0.86 Range: 0.50-1.00

0 4 6 0 0

5 0 Nominal frequency

Default: 50 Hz

Range: 50/60 Hz

NOTE! Now go back to menu 007, 008 and set it to "oFF' and then to menu 001.

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 102 of 158

7.17 Programmable relay K1 and K2 The soft starter has three built-in auxiliary relays, K3 (change over contacts), is always used as an alarm relay. The other two relays, K1 and K2 (closing contacts), are programmable.

K1 and K2 can be set to either "Operation", "Full Voltage" or "Pre-alarm" indication. If DC-brake is chosen the relay K2 will be dedicated to this function.

Fig. 50 Start/stop sequence and relay function "Operation" and "Full voltage".

0510 Setting of K1 indication

Default: 1

Range: 1,2,3,4,5 1 K1 is set for "Operation"

2 K1 is set for "Full Voltage"

3 K1 is set for "Power pre-alarm"

4 No function

5 K1 is set for "Run"

0 5 ° o

2 Setting of K2 indication

Default: 2

Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

1 K2 is set for "Operation"

2 K2 is set for "Full Voltage"

3 K2 is set for "Power pre-alarm"

4 K2 is set for "Softbrake"

5 K2 is set for "Run"

WARNING! if the Soft Brake function has been selected once and after that the Bypass function Is selected, then the relay functions on K1. and K2 remain in the Soft Brake functionality. Therefore It is necessary to change the relay functions in menu 51-52 manually to the Bypass functions (see § 7.12, page 43) or reset to default in menu 199 (see § 7.28, page 63) and select the Bypass function again.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU 51

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 103 of 158

7.18 Analogue output The soft starter can present current, voltage and power on an analogue output terminal, for connection to a recording instrument or a PLC. The output can be configured in 4 different ways, 0-10V, 2-10y, 0-20mA or 4-20 mA. To install the instrument proceed as follows:

1. Connect the instrument to terminal 19 (+) and 15 (-).

Fig. 51 Wiring for analogue output.

2. Set Jumper J2 on the PCB board to voltage (U) or current (I) signal position. Factory setting is voltage (U). See Fig. 52 on page 52 and Fig. 24 on page 28.

Fig. 52 Setting of current or voltage output.

3. Set the parameter in menu 054.

0 5 4 °0

o F F Analogue output

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1, 2

oFF Analogue ouput is disabled

1 Analogue output is set to 0-10V/0-20mA

2 Analogue output is set to 0-10V/ 4-20mA

52 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU

4. Choose a read-out value in menu 055

055°0

1.

Analogue output value

Default: 1

Range: 1, 2, 3

1 RMS current, default range 0-5xin

2 Line input RMS voltage, default range 0-720V

3 Output shaft power, default range 0-2xPn

5. Set analogue output gain to adjust the range of cho- sen analogue output value in menu 056.

5 6 0 0

0 0 Analogue output gain

Default: 100%

Range: 5-150%

Example on settings:

Set value !scale Uscale Pscale

100% 0-5x1n 0-720V 0-2x Pn

50% 0-2.5xIn 0-360V 0-Pn

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 104 of 158

7.19 Digital input selection The analogue input can be used as a digital input. This is programmed in Menu 57. There are 4 different func- tions:

Rotation sensor input for braking functions. See § 7.14, page 46. Slow speed external controlled. See § 7.15.1, page 48. Jog functions forward or reverse enabled. See § 7.25, page 61.

Fig. 53 shows how to set the input for voltage or cur- rent control, with jumper J1 the control board. The default setting for J1 is voltage control.

Fig. 53 Setting offs for current or voltage control.

Fig. 54 shows a wiring example for the analogue input as it is used for digital input.

Fig. 54 Wiring for slow speed external input.

NOTE! If the Main Function Analogue control is program- med (see § 7.8, page 41) the analogue input can not be used for digital signal Input. The menu 57 Is then automatically set to OFF.

0 5 7 ° o

o F F Digital input selection

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1-4

oFF No digital input control

1 Rotation sensor for brake functions

2 Slow speed function

3 Jog forward command

4 Jog reverse command

NOTE! Jog forward, reverse has to be enabled, see § 7.25, Page 61.

Depending on the selection made in menu 57, menu 58 is used to program the number of the edges. The edges can be generated by an external sensor (photo cell, micro switch etc.).

0 5 8 ° o

1 Digital input pulses

Default: 1

Range: 1-100 If Menu 57=1 A positive or negative edge at analogue input from a rotation sensor will give a signal to stop the braking voltage. If Menu 57=2 The number of edges to be ignored by the slow speed input, before a start or stop is executed at slow speed.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU 53

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 105 of 158

7.20 Parameter Set Parameter Set, an important function which can be handy when using one soft starter to switch in and start different motors, or working under variable load con- ditions. For example; starting and stopping conveyor belts with different weight on the goods from time to time.

For sets of parameters can be controlled either from the keyboard, the external control inputs or the serial interface (option). Up to 51 different parameters can be set for each Parameter Set.

IParameter Set 4

Parameter Set 3

Parameter Set 2

001, 002, 003, 004, 006, 011, 012, 013, 014, 016, 017, 020, 021, 022, 023, 024, 025, 030, 031, 032, 033, 034, 035, 036, 037, 038, 039, 040, 041, 042, 043, 044, 045, 055, 056, 057, 058, 074, 075, 081, 082, 083, 084, 085, 086, 091, 092, 093, 094, 095, 096, 097, 098, 099, 101, 102,103,104

03-F48

Common for all parameter set

007, 008, 046, 051, 052, 061, 071, 072, 088, 089, 105, 111, 112, 113, 114, 199, 206

Fig. 55 Parameter overview

When 'Parameter set' in menu 061 is set to 0 (external selection), only parameters in menu 006 (Control mode) and 061 (Parameter set) can be changed. All other parameters are not allowed to change.

It is possible to change parameter set at stop and at full voltage running.

54 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU

06 1 c '0

Parameter set

Default: 1

Range: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4

0 Parameter set are selected by the external input 16 and 17 (see below).

1, 2, 3, 4 Selection of parameter set 1-4.

Fig. 56 Connection of external control inputs.

Parameter Set PS1 (16-18) PS2 (17-18)

1 Open Open 2 Closed Open 3 Open Closed 4 Closed Closed

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 106 of 158

7.21 Motor protection, overload (F2 alarm)

In many cases it is convenient to have a complete starter. The soft starter have a possibility to use either an input PTC signal from the motor, an internal ther- mal model of the motor for thermal protection or both together at the same time. Slight overload for long time and several overloads of short duration will be detected with both methods.

0710

no Motor PTC input

Default: no

Range: no, YES

no Motor PTC input is disabled

YES

Motor PTC input is activated: - Connect the PTC to terminals 69

and 70, see table 12, page 32 and § Fig. 30, page 34.

- A to hot motor will give an F2 alarm. The alarm can only be reset- ted after cooling down of the motor.

NOTE! Open terminals will give an F2 alarm immediately. Make sure the PTC is always connected or the terminals are shorted.

NOTE! The Internal motor thermal protection will still generate an alarm If It Is not selected oFF.

0 2 ° o

1 0 Internal motor thermal protection

Default: 10

Range: oFF, 2-40 sec

oFF Internal motor protection is disabled.

240

Selection of the thermal curve according to Fig. 57 - Check that menu 042 is set to the

proper motor current (see § 7.16, page 50).

- If the current exceeds the 100% level an F2 alarm is activated.

- The motor model thermal capacity must cool down to 95% before reset can be accepted.

- Used thermal capacity in menu 073 in § 7.21, page 55.

NOTE! If 'Bypass' is used check that the current trans- formers are placed and connected correctly (see Fig. 43 on page 44).

CAUTION! Used thermal capacity is set to 0 if the control board loses Its supply (terminal 01 and 02). This means that the internal thermal model starts with a 'cold' motor, which perhaps in reality is not the case. This means that the motor can be overheated.

) Fig. 57 The thermal curve

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU 55

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 107 of 158

0730

0 Used thermal capacity

Default: -

Range: 0-150%

Read-out of the used thermal capacity. If menu 072 'Internal motor thermal protection' is selected oFF, the capacity is shown as if the default class 10 was selected.

0740

o F F

Starts per hour limitation

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1-99/hour

oFF Starts per hour limitation is disabled.

1-99 Sets the start per hour limitation alarm. If the selected number is exceeded, alarm F11 occurs.

0750

o F F

Locked rotor alarm

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1.0-10.0 sec

oFF Locked rotor alarm is disabled

1.0-10.0 An F5 alarm is given when the rotor locks. The alarm is active during starting and running.

56 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU

7.22 Mains protection

081 0 0

1 0 Voltage unbalance alarm

Default: 10

Range: 2 -25% Un

Insert limit in % of nominal motor voltage. Max unbalance in voltage between the 3 input phases is compared with the selected value. This is a cate- gory 2 alarm.

0820

o F F Response delay voltage unbalance alarm

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1-60 sec

oFF Unbalance voltage alarm is disabled

1-60 Set the response delay time for unbalanced voltage alarm F8.

0830

1 1 5 Over voltage alarm

Default: 115

Range: 100 -150% lip Insert limit in % of nominal motor voltage. Max volt- age of the 3 input phases is compared with the selected value. This is a category 2 alarm.

0840

o F F Response delay over voltage alarm

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1-60 sec

oFF Overvoltage alarm is disabled

3.-60 Set the response delay time for over voltage alarm F9.

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 108 of 158

NOTE! The actual phase sequence can be viewed In menu 87,

101815 ° 0

o F F Under voltage alarm

Default: 85

Range: 75-100 Un

Insert limit in % of nominal motor voltage. Min volt- age of the 3 input phases is compared with the selected value. This is a category 2 alarm.

086 ° o

o F F Response delay under voltage alarm

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1-60 sec

oFF Under voltage alarm is disabled

1-60 Set the response delay time for under voltage alarm F10

0870 Phase sequence

Default: -

Range: L123, L321

L123 is the d'rect phase sequence. L321 is the reverse phase sequence.

088 ° o

o F F Phase reversal alarm

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, on

oFF Phase reversal alarm is disabled

on

Sets the phase reversal Alarm. - Switch on the power supply first.

The phase sequence is stored as the correct sequence.

- Sets the menu 088 to "on". - Any reversal of phase sequence will

cause alarm F16.

7.23 Application protection (load monitor)

7.23.1 Load monitor max and min/protection (F6 and F7 alarms)

MSF has a built in load monitor based on the output shaftpower. This is a unique and important function which enables protection of machines and processes driven by the motor connected to the soft starter. Both a Min and Max limit is possible to select.

In combination with the pre-alarm function, see § 7.23.2, page 58, this create a powerful protection. An auto set function is also included for an automatic set- ting of the alarm limits. A start-up delay time can be selected to avoid undesired alarms at start-up, see Fig. 58 on page 60.

NOTE! The load monitor alarms are all disabled during a stop ramp.

01819 °0

n o Auto set power limits

Default: no

Range: no, YES

no Auto set is disabled

YES Auto set is activated if ENTER is pressed.

0900

0 Output shaftpower in %

Default: -

Range: 0-200%

Measured output shaftpower in % of nominal motor power.

NOTE! System must be In full voltage running before an auto set is permitted.

The actual power is regarded as 1.00xP The set levels are:

Power max alarm limit[092]: Power max pre-alarm limit[094]: Power min pre-alarm limit[096]: Power min alarm limit[098]:

act.

1.15xP actual 1.10xP actual 0.90xP actual 0.85xP actual

A successful auto set shows a message 'Set' for 3 s and if something goes wrong a message 'no' will be showed.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU 57

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 109 of 158

91 °°

10 Start delay power limits

Default: 10 sec

Range: 1-250 sec

From start command during selected delay time, all power load monitor alarms and pre-alarms are disa- bled.

0 9 2 ° o

1 1 5 Max power alarm limit

Default: 115

Range: 5-200% Pn

Insert limit in % of nominal motor power. The actual power in % of nominal motor power, could be read out in menu 090. If output shaft power exceeds selected limit, an F6-alarm occurs after the response delay time. The 'Auto set' function in menu 089, affect this limit even if the alarm is set "oFF" in menu 093. This is a category 1 alarm.

.093 g

o F F

Response delay max alarm

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 0.1-25.0 sec

oFF Max Alarm is disabled.

0.1-25.0 Sets the response delay of the Max Alarm level.

58 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU

7.232 Pre-alarm It could be useful to know if the load is changing towards a load alarm limit. It is possible to insert both a Max and Min pre-alarm limit based on the motor out- put shaft power. If the load exceeds one of these limits, a pre-alarm condition occurs.

It should be noted that it is not normal alarms. They will not be inserted in the alarm list, not activat- ing the alarm relay output, not displayed on the display and they will not stop operation. But it is possible to activate relay K1 or K2 if a pre-alarm condition occurs. To have pre-alarm status on any of these relays, select value 3 in menu 051 or 052 (see § 7.17, page 51).

A start-up delay time can be selected in menu 091 to avoid undesired pre-alarms at start-up. Note that this time is also shared with power Max and MM alarms.

NOTE! The pre-alarm status Is always available on the serial communication.

0940

1 1 Max power pre-alarm limit

Default: 110

Range: 5 -200% Pn

Insert limit in % of nominal motor power. The actual power in % of nominal motor power, could be read out in menu 090. If output shaft power exceeds selected limit, a pre-alarm occurs after the respon- se delay time. The 'Auto set' function in menu 089, affect selected limit even if the pre-alarm is set "oFF" in menu 095.

0950

o F F Max pre-alarm response delay

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 0.1 - 25.0 sec

oFF Max Pre-Alarm is disabled.

0.1-25.0 Sets the response delay of the Max Pre-Alarm level.

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 110 of 158

9 6 ° 0

9 0 Min power pre-alarm limit

Default: 90%

Range: 5 -200% Pn

Insert limit in % of nominal motor power. The actual power in % of nominal motor power, could be read out in menu 090. If output shaft power goes below selected limit, a pre-alarm occurs after the response delay time. The 'Auto set' function in menu 089, affect selected limit even if the pre- alarm is set "oFF" in menu 097.

097°° o

o F Min pre-alarm response delay

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 0.1 - 25.0 sec

oFF Min Pre-Alarm is disabled.

0.1-25.0 Sets the response delay of the Min Pre-Alarm level. The Min Pre-alarm is disabled during a stop ramp down.

0980

8 5 Min power alarm limit

Default: 85

Range: 5-200% Pn

Insert limit in % of nominal motor power. The actual power in % of nominal motor power, could be read out in menu 090. If output shaft power goes below selected limit, an F7-alarm occurs after the response delay time. The 'Auto set' function in menu 089, affect this limit even if the alarm is set 'oFF' in menu 099. This is a category 1 alarm.

0990°

o F F

Min alarm response delay

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 0.1-25.0 sec

oFF Min Alarm is disabled

0.1-25.0 Sets the response delay of the Min Alarm level. The Min alarm is disa- bled during a stop ramp down.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU 59

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 111 of 158

0 '1

1

0:4.

oo

oo

92 M

ax A

larm

(11

5%)

Sta

rt r

amp

94 M

ax P

re-a

larm

(11

0%)

100%

D

efau

lt:P

Nom

or

Aut

oset

:PM

OM

EN

TA

RY

96 M

in P

re-a

larm

(90

%)

98 M

in A

larm

(85

%)

Max

Ala

rm

Max

Pre

-ala

rm

Min

Pre

-ala

rm

Min

Ala

rm

10

93 R

espo

nse

Del

ay (

1s)

Und

er lo

ad s

ituat

ion

Ove

rload

situ

atio

n

--,-

-4-h

p.11

=11

1111

111-

--

95 R

espo

nse

Del

ay (

1s)

91 S

tart

Del

ay(1

0s)

97 R

espo

nse

Del

ay (

1s)

ON

=

99 R

espo

nse

Del

ay (

1s)

193

Res

pons

e D

elay

(1s

)

95 R

espo

nse

Del

ay (

is)

03-F

96

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 112 of 158

7.24 Resume alarms

7.24.1 Phase input failure Fl Multiple phase failure. Shorter failure than 100ms is ignored. If failure duration time is between 100 ms and 2 s, operation is temporary stopped and a soft start is made if the failure disappears before 2 s. If failure duration time is longer than 2 s, an Fl alarm is given in cat. 2. Single phase failure. During start up (acceleration) the behaviour is like multiple phase failure below. When full voltage running there is a possibility to select the behaviour.

1 0 1 ° 0

n o Run at single phase loss

Default: no

Range: no, YES

no Soft starter trips if a single phase loss is detected. Alarm Fl (category 2) will appear after 2 sec.

YES

Soft starter continues to run after a single phase loss. - Alarm Fl appears after 2 sec. - If the loose phase is reconnect the alarm is reset automatically.

- If running on 2 phases, a stop com- mand will give a Direct on line stop (freewheel)

7.24.2 Run at current limit time-out F4 In modes 'Current limit at start' and 'Voltage ramp with current limit at start' an alarm is activated if still operating at current limit level when selected ramp time exceeds. If an alarm occurs there is a possibility to select the behaviour.

10 2 °0

n o Run at current limit time-out

Default: no

Range: no, YES

no Soft starter trips if the current limit time-out is exceeded. Alarm F4 (cate- gory 2) appears.

YES

Soft starter continues to run after the current limit time-out has exceeded: - Alarm F4 appears - The current is no longer controlled

and the soft starters ramps up to full voltage with a 6s ramp time.

- Reset the alarm with either ENTER/ RESET key or by giving a stop com- mand.

7.25 Slow speed with JOG Slow speed with "JOG" is possible from the "JOG" keys, but also from terminals, see menu 57 page 53 and serial comm. The "JOG" is ignored if the soft starter is running. The slow speed "JOG" function has to be enabled for both forward and reverse directions in menus 103 and 104, see below.

NOTE! The enable functions is for all control modes.

1030

o F F

JOG forward enable

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, on

oFF JOG forward disabled

on JOG forward enabled

1 0 4 ° o

oFF JOG reverse enable

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, on

oFF JOG reverse disabled

on JOG reverse enabled

03-F108

Fig 59 The 2 Jog keys.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU 61

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 113 of 158

7.26 Automatic return menu Often it is desirable to have a specific menu on the dis- play during operation, i.e. RMS current or power con- sumption. The Automatic return menu function gives the possibility to select any menu in the menu system.

The menu selected will come up on the display after 60 sec. if no keyboard activity. The alarm messages (F1 -F16) have a priority over menu 105 (as they have for all menus).

1051° 0

o F F

Automatic return menu

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1-999

1-999 Pressing "+"/"-" will lead through the menu system.

7.27 Communication option, related Parameters

The following parameters have to be set-up: - Unit address. - Baud rate.

Parity - Behaviour when contact broken.

Setting up the communication parameter must be made in local 'Keyboard control' mode. See § 7.2, page 37.

111 °°

1.

Serial comm unit address

Default: 1

Range: 1-247

This parameter will select the unit address.

1120°

9. 6 Serial comm baudrate

Default: 9.6

Range: 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 kBaud

This parameter will select the baudrate.

62 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU

1130°

0 Serial comm parity

Default: 0

Range: 0.1

This parameter will select the parity. 0 No parity. 1 Even parity.

Serial comm. broken alarm If control mode is 'Serial comm. control' and no con- tact is established or contact is broken the Soft starter consider the contact to be broken after 15 sec, the soft starter can act in three different ways:

1 Continue without any action at all. 2 Stop and alarm after 15 sec. 3 Continue and alarm after 15 sec.

If an alarm occurs, it is automatically reset if the com- munication is re-established. It is also possible to reset the alarm from the soft starter keyboard.

114 ° o

1 Serial comm. contact interrupted

Default: 1

Range: oFF, 1, 2

This parameter will control the behaviour in the soft starter when the serial comm. is interrupted. oFF No alarm and continue operation. 1 Alarm and stop operation. 2 Alarm and continue operation.

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 114 of 158

7.28 Reset to factory setting [199] When selecting reset to factory settings:

All parameters in all parameter sets will have default factory settings. Menu 001 will appear on the display. Note that the alarm list, the power consumption and the operation time will not have default set- tings.

1 9 9 ° o

n o Reset to factory settings

Default: no

Range: no, YES

no No reset

YES Reset all functions to the factory defaults incl. all 4 Parameter Sets.

NOTE! Reset to factory settings Is not allowed at run.

7.29 View operation

General The soft start includes as standard a numerous metering functions which eliminates the need of additional transducers and meters.

Measured values - Current RMS 3-phase current and per phase - Voltage RMS 3-phase voltage and per phase - Output shaft power /torque kW/Nm - Power factor - Power consumption in kWh - Operation time in hours

Viewing of the measured values After setting motor data and extended functions one can set menu 008 in oFF and will then automatically move to menu 201, the first menu viewing the meas- ured values and thus eliminate to scroll through menu 011 to menu 199.

2010

0. 0 RMS current

Default: -

Range: 0.0 - 9999Amp

Read-out of the RMS motor current.

page 36.

202g

0.0 RMS main voltage

Default: -

Range: 0-720V

The RMS input main voltage.

2 0 3 ° o

0. Output motor shaftpower

Default: -

Range: -9999 -+9999kW

Viewing will show negative value if generator mode.

2 4 ° o

0. 0 Power factor

Default: -

Range: 0.00-1

View the actual power factor.

NOTE! The power factor viewing will not work at bypass even If the current transformers are mounted outside the soft start.

2 0 5 0°

0.0 0 0 Total power consumption

Default: -

Range: 0.000 -2000MWh

View the total power consumption.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU 63

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 115 of 158

06 ° o

no Reset of power consumption

Default: no

Range: no, YES

no No reset of power consumtion.

YES Reset power consumption in menu 205 to 0.000.

[207°0 o

0. 0 Motor shaft torque

Default: -

Range: -9999 - + 9999Nm

Viewing will show negative value if generator mode.

2080

0.0 Operation time

Default: -

Range: Hours

Operation time is calculated when the soft starter is in RUN mode. After 9999 hours the display will show two values. Example: 12467 hours shows 1 1 sec

2467 5sec

2110

0. RMS current in phase LI

Default: -

Range: 0.0 - 9999Amp

View the current in phase L1.

64 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU

2120

0.0 RMS current in phase L2

Default: -

Range: 0.0 - 9999Amp

View the current in phase L2.

213°0

0. RMS current In phase L3

Default: -

Range: 0.0 - 9999Amp

View the current in phase L3.

2140

0 Main voltage u-u

Default: -

Range: 0-720V

View main voltage L1-L2.

2150

0 Main voltage L1-L3

Default: -

Range: 0 - 720V

View main voltage L1-L3.

2160

0 Main voltage L2-L3

Default: -

Range: 0 - 720V

View main voltage L2-L3.

--- t1111).4

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 116 of 158

7.30 Keyboard lock The keyboard can be locked to prohibit operation and parameter setting by an unauthorised. Lock keyboard by pressing both keys "NEXT " and "ENTER

" for at least 2 sec. The message '- Loc' will display when locked. To unlock keyboard press the same 2 keys "NEXT " and "ENTER .0 " for at least 2 sec. The message 'unlo' will display when unlocked.

In locked mode it is possible to view all parameters and read-out, but it is forbidden to set parameters and to operate the soft starter from the keyboard.

The message '-Loc' will display if trying to set a parameter or operate the soft starter in locked mode.

The key lock status can be read out in menu 221.

[2 2 1 g

no Locked keyboard info

Default: no

Range: no, YES

no Keyboard is not locked

YES Keyboard is locked

7.31 Alarm list The alarm list is generated automatically. It shows the latest 15 alarms (F1 - F16). The alarm list can be useful when tracing a failure in the soft starter or its control circuit. Press key "NEXT --. " or "PREV " to reach the alarm list in menus 901-915 (menu 007 has to be ON).

9010

l Alarm

Default: -

Range: F1-F16

View actual alarm

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU 65

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 117 of 158

0,

8. PROTECTION AND ALARM

The soft starter is equipped with a protection system for the motor, the machine and for the soft starter itself. Three categories of alarm are available:

Category 1 Alarm that stops the motor and need a separate reset before a new start can be accepted. Category 2 Alarm that stops the motor and accepts a new start command without any separate reset. Category 3 Alarm that continues to run the motor.

All alarm, except pre-alarm, will activate the alarm relay output K3, flash a red fault number on the display and it will also be placed in the alarm list. As long as the alarm is active, the display is locked in the alarm indication.

The relay output K3 can be used in the control cir- cuit for actions needed when alarm occurs.

If more than one alarm is active, it is the last alarm that is presented on the display.

8.1 Alarm description

8.1.1 Alarm with stop and requiring a separate reset

Operation will stop for a category 1 alarm. A separate reset is needed before a new start command is accepted. It is possible to reset from keyboard (pushing "ENTER /RESET ") regardless of selected control mode. It is also possible to reset the alarm from the actual control mode (i.e. if control mode is serial com- munication, a reset is possible to do from serial com- munication).

A reset is accepted first when the alarm source goes back to normal.

When a reset is made, the alarm relay output K3 is deactivated, the alarm indication on the display disap- pear and the original menu shows.

After a reset is made the system is ready for a new start command.

8.1.2 Alarm with stop and requiring only a new start command

Operation will stop for a category 2 alarm. A restart can be done and at the same time the alarm relay out- put K3 is deactivated, the alarm indication on the dis- play disappear and the original menu shows.

It is still possible to reset the alarm in the same way as for category 1 alarms (see 8.1.1), if a start is not required at the time.

66 PROTECTION AND ALARM

8.1.3 Alarm with continue run Operation will continue run for a category 3 alarm. Some different reset behaviour is possible (see remarks for the specific alarms in § 8.2, page 67).

Automatic reset when the alarm source goes back to normal. Automatic reset when a stop command is given. Manual reset during run.

When the reset occurs, the alarm relay output K3 is deactivated, the alarm indication on the display disap- pear and the original menu shows.

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 118 of 158

8.2 Alarm overview

Display indication Protective function Alarm category Remark

Fl Phase input failure.

Cat 3. Run with auto reset.

Single phase failure when full voltage running if menu 101 'Run at phase loss' = YES. If the fault phase comes back, an automatic reset is made.

Cat 2. Stop with reset in start. Multiple phase failure or single phase failure when not full voltage running or if menu 101 ' Run at phase loss' = no.

F2 Motor protection, overload. Cat 1. Stop with manual reset.

If menu 071 'Motor PTC input' = YES, cool down the motor. If menu 071 'Motor PTC input' = no, the internal model has to 'cool' down.

F3 Soft start overheated Cat 1. Stop with manual reset. If not cooled down, a reset will not be accepted.

F4 Full speed not reached at set current limit and start time.

If menu 102 'Run at current limit time-out' = no. Cat 2. Stop with reset in start.

The current limit start is not corn- pleted.

If menu 102 'Run at current limit time-out' = YES. Cat 3. Run with manual reset.

When start time expired, a 6 sec ramp is used to reach full voltage, without control of the current. Reset the alarm with either a manual reset or a stop command.

F5 Locked rotor. Cat 1. Stop with manual reset. Motor and/or machine protection.

F6 Above max power limit. Cat 1. Stop with manual reset. Machine protection.

F7 Below min power limit. Cat 1. Stop with manual reset. Machine protection. F8 Voltage unbalance. Cat 2. Stop with reset in start. Motor protection. F9 Over voltage. Cat 2. Stop with reset in start. Motor protection. F10 Under voltage. Cat 2. Stop with reset in start. Motor protection.

F11 Starts / hour exceeded. Cat 2. Stop with reset in start. Motor and/or machine protection.

F12 Shorted thyristor. Cat 3. Run with manual reset.

When stop command comes, the stop will be a 'Direct On Line' stop, and the soft starter will be resetted. After this fault it is possible to start only in 'Direct On Line' mode. One or more thyristors probably damaged.

F13 Open thyristor. Cat 1. Stop with manual reset. One or more thyristors probably dam- aged.

F14 Motor terminal open. Cat 1. Stop with manual reset. Motor not correctly connected.

F15 Serial communication broken.

If menu 114 Serial comm. con- tact broken = 1. Cat 2. Stop with reset in start.

Serial communication broken will stop operation. Run from keyboard if nec- essary.

If menu 114 Serial comm. con- tact broken = 2. Cat 3. Run with auto reset.

Serial communication broken will not stop operation. Stop from keyboard if necessary.

F16 Phase reversal alarm. Cat 1. Stop with manual reset. Incorrect phase order on main voltage input.

PROTECTION AND ALARM 67

...-.../

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 119 of 158

9. TROUBLE SHOOTING

9.1 Fault, cause and solution

Observation Fault indication Cause Solution

The display is not illuminated. None No control voltage. Switch on the control voltage.

The motor does not run.

Fl (Phase input failure)

Fuse defective. Renew the fuse.

No mains supply. Switch the main supply on.

F2 (Motor protection, overload)

Perhaps PTC connection. Perhaps incorrect nominal motor current inserted (menu 042).

Check the PTC input if PTC protec- tion is used. If internal protection is used, per- haps an other class could be used (menu 072). Cool down the motor and make a reset.

F3 (Soft start overheated)

Ambient temperature to high. soft starter duty cycle exceeded. Perhaps fan failure.

Check ventilation of cabinet. Check the size of the cabinet. Clean the cooling fins. If the fan(s) is not working cor- rect, contact your local MSF sales outlet.

F4 (Full speed not reached at set current limit and start time)

Current limit parameters are perhaps not matched to the load and motor.

Increase the starting time and/or the current limit level.

F5 (Locked rotor)

Something stuck in the machine or perhaps motor bearing fail- ore.

Check the machine and motor bearings. Perhaps the alarm delay time can be set longer (menu 075).

F6 (Above max power limit) Overload

Over load. Check the machine. Perhaps the alarm delay time can be set longer (menu 093).

F7 (Below min power limit) Underload

Under load. Check the machine. Perhaps the alarm delay time can be set longer (menu 099).

F8 (Voltage unbalance) Main supply voltage unbalance. Check mains supply.

F9 (Over voltage) Main supply over voltage. Check mains supply.

F10 (Under voltage) Main supply under voltage. Check mains supply.

F11 (Starts / hour exceeded)

Number of starts exceeded according to menu 074.

Wait and make a new start. Perhaps the number of starts / hour could be increased in menu 074.

F13 (Open thyristor) Perhaps erhaps a damaged thyristor.

Make a reset and a restart. If the same alarm appears immediately, contact your local MSF sales out- let.

F14 (Motor terminal open)

Open motor contact, cable or motor winding.

If the fault is not found, reset the alarm and inspect the alarm list. If alarm F12 is found, a thyristor is probably shorted. Make a restart. If alarm F14 appears immediately, contact your local MSF sales outlet.

68 TROUBLE SHOOTING

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 120 of 158

Observation Fault indication Cause Solution

The motor does not run.

F15 (Serial communication bro- ken)

Serial communication broken.

Make a reset and try to establish contact. Check contacts, cables and option board. Verify - System address (menu 111).

Baudrate (menu 112). - - Parity ty (menu 113). If the fault is not found, run the motor with keyboard control if urgent (set menu 006 to "1"). See also manual for serial communica- tion.

F16 (Phase reversal)

Incorrect phase sequence on main supply. Switch L2 and L3 input phases.

Start command comes perhaps from incorrect control source. (I.e. start from keyboard when remote control is selected).

Give start command from correct source (menu 006).

-Loc System in keyboard lock. Unlock keyboard by pressing the keys 'NEXT' and 'ENTER' for at least 3 sec.

The motor is run- ning but an alarm is given.

Fl (Phase input failure)

Failure in one phase. Perhaps fuse defective.

Check fuses and mains supply. Deselect 'Run at single phase input failure' in menu 101, if stop is desired at single phase loss.

F4 (Full speed not reached at set current limit and start time)

Current limit parameters are perhaps not matched to the load and motor.

Increase the starting time and/or the current limit level. Deselect 'Run at current limit time-out' in menu 102, if stop is desired at current limit time-out.

F12 (Shorted thyristor)

Perhaps a damaged thyristor.

When stop command is given, a free wheel stop is made. Make a reset and a restart. If alarm F14 appears immediately, contact your local MSF sales outlet. If it is urgent to start the motor, set soft starter in 'Direct On Line' (menu 024). It is possible to start in this mode.

By pass contactor is used but menu 032 'Bypass' is not set to "on".

Set menu 032 'Bypass' to "on".

F15 (Serial communication bro- ken)

Serial communication broken.

Make a reset and try to establish contact. Check contacts, cables and option board. Verify - System address (menu 111). - Baudrate (menu 112). - Parity (menu 113). If the fault is not found, run the motor with keyboard control if urgent, see also manual for serial communication.

TROUBLE SHOOTING 69

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 121 of 158

Observation Fault indication Cause Solution

The motor jerks etc.

When starting, motor reaches full speed but it jerks or vibrates.

If 'Torque control' or 'Pump con- trol' is selected, it is necessary to input motor data into the sys- tern.

Input nominal motor data in menus 041-046. Select the proper load characteristic in menu 025. Select a correct initial- and end torque at start in menus 016 and 017. If 'Bypass' is selected, check that the current transformers are correct connected.

Starting time too short. Increase starting time.

Starting voltage incorrectly set. Adjust starting voltage.

Motor too small in relation to rated current of soft starter.

Use a smaller model of the soft starter.

Motor too large in relation to load of soft starter. Use larger model of soft starter.

Starting voltage not set correctly

Readjust the start ramp.

Select the current limit function.

Starting or stopping time too long, soft does not work.

Ramp times not set correctly. Readjust the start and/or stop ramp time.

Motor too large or too small in relation to load. Change to another motor size.

The monitor func- tion does not work. No alarm or pre-alarm

It is necessary to input nominal motor data for this function. Incorrect alarm levels.

Input nominal motor data in menus 041-046. Adjust alarm levels in menus 091 - 099. If 'Bypass' is selected, check that the current transformers are correct con- nected.

Unexplainable alarm. F5, F6, F7, F8, F9, F10 Alarm delay time is to short.

Adjust the response delay times for the alarms in menus 075, 082, 084, 086, 093 and 099.

The system seems locked in an alarm.

F2 (Motor protection, overload)

PTC input terminal could be open. Motor could still be to warm. If internal motor protection is used, the cooling in the internal model take some time.

PTC input terminal should be short circuit if not used. Wait until motor PTC gives an OK (not over- heated) signal. Wait until the internal cooling is done. Try to reset the alarm after awhile.

F3 (Soft start overheated)

Ambient temperature to high. Perhaps fan failure.

Check that cables from power part are connected in terminals 073, 074, 071 and 072. MSF-017 to MSF-145 should have a short circuit between 071 and 072. Check also that the fan(s) is rotat- ing.

Parameter will not be accepted.

_ _ _ _ If the menu number is one of 020 - 025, only one can bee selected. In other words only one main mode is possible at a time.

Deselect the other main mode before selecting the new one.

r set' is If menu 061, 'Parameter i i set to "0", the system is in a

remote parameter selection mode. It is now impossible to change most of the parameters.

Set the menu 061, 'Parameter set' to a value between "1" - "4" and then it is possible to change any parameter.

During acceleration, decelera- tion, slow speed, DC brake a. nd Power factor control mode, it is impossible to change parame- ters.

Set parameters during stop or full voltage running.

If control source is serial comm., it is impossible to change parameters from key- board and vice versa.

Change parameters from the actual control source.

Some menus include only read out values and not parameters.

Read-out values can not be alte- red. In table 13, page 35, read-out menus has '-' in the factory set- ting column.

-Loc Keyboard is locked. Unlock keyboard by pressing the keys 'NEXT' and 'ENTER' for at least 3 sec.

70 TROUBLE SHOOTING

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 122 of 158

10. MAINTENANCE

In general the soft starter is maintenance free. There are however some things which should be checked regu- larly. Especially if the surroundings are dusty the unit should be cleaned regularly.

WARNING! Do not touch parts Inside the enclosure of the unit. when the control and motor voltage Is switched on.

Regular maintenance Check that nothing in the soft starter has been dam- aged by vibration (loose screws or connections). Check external wiring, connections and control signals. Tighten terminal screws and busbar bolts if necessary. Check that PCB boards, thyristors and cooling fin are free from dust. Clean with compressed air if necessary. Make sure the PCB boards and thyristors are undamaged. Check for signs of overheating (changes in colour on PCB boards, oxidation of solder points etc.). Check that the temperature is within permissible limits. Check that the cooling fan/s permit free air flow. Clean any external air filters if necessary.

In the event of fault or if a fault cannot be cured by using the fault-tracing table in chapter 9. page 68.

MAINTENANCE 71

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 123 of 158

11. OPTIONS

The following option are available. Please contact your supplier for more detailed information.

11.1 Serial communication For serial communication the MODBUS RTU (RS232/RS485) option card is available order number: 01-1733-00.

Fig. 60 Option RS232/485

11.2 Field bus systems Various option cards are available for the following bus systems:

PROFIBUS DP order number: 01-1734-01 Device NET, order number: 01-1736-01 LONWORKS: 01-1737-01 FIP 10: 01-1738-01 INTERBUS-S: 01-1735-01

Each system has his own card. The option is delivered with an instruction manual containing the all details for the set-up of the card and the protocol for program- ming.

Fig. 61 Option Profibus

72 OPTIONS

11.3 External PPU. The external PPU option is used to move the PPU (keyboard) from the soft starter to the front of a panel door or control cabinet.

The maximum distance between the soft starter and the external PPU is 3 m. The option can be factory mounted (01-2138-01) or it can be built in later (01-2138-00). For both versions instruction /data sheet are available.

Fig. 62 Shows an example of the External PPU after it has been built in.

11.3.1 Cable kit for external current transformers

This kit is used for the bypass function, to connect the external current transformers more easy. order number: 01-2020-00.

Fig. 63 Cable kit

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 124 of 158

11.4 Terminal clamp Data: Single cables, Cu or Al Cables 95-300 mm2 MSF type Cu Cable 310 Bolt for connection to busbar M10 Dimensions in mm 33x84x47 mm Order No. single 9350 Data: Parallel cables, Cu or Al Cables 2x95-300 mm2 MSF type and Cu Cable 310 to -835 Bolt for connection to busbar M10 Dimensions in mm 35x87x65 Order No. parallel 9351

Fig. 64 The terminal clamp.

OPTIONS 73

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 125 of 158

12. TECHNICAL DATA

3x200-525 V 50/60 Hz Model MSF-017 MSF-030 MSF-045 MSF060

Soft starter rating according to AC35a, see chapter 4. page 13

5.0-30:50-10 heavy

3.0-30:50-10 normal/light

5.0-30:50-10 heavy

3.0-30:50-10 normal/light

5.0-30:50-10 heavy

3.0-30:50-10 normal/light

5.0-30:50-10 heavy

3.0-30:50-10 normal/fight

Rated current of soft starter (A) 17 22 30 37 45 60 60 72 Recommended motor size (kW) for 400 V 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 30 37 Recommended motor size (kW) for 525 V 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 37 45 Order number: supply voltage (100-240V) 01-1301-01 01-1302-01 01-1303-01 01-1304-01 Order number: supply voltage (380-500V) 01-1301-02 01-1302-02 01-1303-02 01-130402

3x200-690V 50/60Hz Model MSF-017 MSF-030 MSF-045 MSF-060 Rated current of soft starter (A) 17 22 30 37 45 60 60 72 Motor power for 690V 15 18.5 22 30 37 55 55 75* Order number: supply voltage (100-240V) 01-1321-01 01-1322-01 01-1323-01 01-1324-01 Order number: supply voltage (380-500V) 01-1321-02 01-1322-02 01-1323-02 01-1324-02

Electrical Data

Recommended wiring fuse (A) 1) 25/50 I 32 35/80 -I 50 50/125 I 80 63/160 I 100 Semi-conductor fuses, if required 80 A 125 A 160 A 200 A

Power loss at rated motor load (W) 50 I 70 90 I 120 140 I 180 180 I 215 Power consumption control card 20 VA 20 VA 25 VA 25 VA

Mechanical Data

Dimensions in mm HxWxD 320x126x260 320x126x260 320x126x260 320x126x260 Mounting position (Vertical/Horizontal) Vertical Vertical Vert. or Horiz. Vert. or Horiz. Weight (kg) 6.7 6.7 6.9 6.9 Connection busbars Cu, (bolt) 15x4 (M6) 15x4 (M6) 15x4 (M6) 15x4 (M8) Cooling system Convection Convection Fan Fan

General Electrical Data

Number of fully controlled phases 3

Voltage tolerance control Control +/- 10%

Voltage tolerance motor Motor 200-525 +/- 10%/200-690 + 5%, -10%

Recommended fuse for control card (A) Max 10 A

Frequency 50/60 Hz

Frequency tolerance +/- 10%

Relay contacts 3 x 8A, 250 V resistive load, 3A 250VAC inductive (PF=0.4)

Type of protection/insulation

Type of casing protection I IP 20

Other General Data

Ambient temperatures

In operation 0.40 *C

Max. e.g. at 80% IN 50 °C

In storage (-25) - (+70) ``C

Relative air humidity 95%, non-condensing

Max. altitude without derating (See separate: Technical information 151) 1000 m

Norms/Standards, Conform to: IEC 947-4-2, EN 292, EN 60204-1, UL508

EMC, Emission EN 50081-2, (EN 50081-1 with bypass contactor) EMC, Immunity EN 50082-2

1) Recommended wiring fuses for: Heavy (first column): ramp/direct start Normal/Light (second column): ramp start

NOTE! Short circuit withstand MSF017-060 5000 rms A when used with K5 or RK5 fuses.

* 2-pole motor

74 TECHNICAL DATA

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 126 of 158

3x200-525 V 50/60 Hz Model MSF075 MSF-085 MSF110 MSF-145

Soft starter rating according to AC35a, see chapter 4. page 13

5.0-30:50-10 heavy

3.0-30:5040 normal /light

5.0-30:50-10 heavy

3.0-30:50-10 normal/light

5.0-30:50-10 heavy

3.0-30:50-10 normal/light

5.0-30:50-10 heavy

3.0-30:50-10 normal/light

Rated current of soft starter (A) 75 85 85 96 110 134 145 156 Recommended motor size (kW) for 400 V 37 45 45 55* 55 75 75 Recommended motor size (kW) for 525 V 45 55 55 75* 75 90 90 110

Order number for supply voltage (100-240 V) 01-1305-01 01-1306-01 01-1307-01 01-1308-01 Order number for supply voltage (380-550 V) 01-1305-02 01-1306-02 01-1307-02 01-1308-02

3x200-690 V 50/60 Hz Model MSF075 MSF-085 MSF-110 MSF145 Rated current of soft starter (A) 75 85 85 90 110 134 145 156 Motor power for 690V 55 75 75 90 90 110 132 160* Order number for supply voltage (100-240 V) 01-1325-01 01-1326-01 01-1327-01 01-1328-01 Order number for supply voltage (380-550 V) 01-1325-02 01-1326-02 01-1327-02 01-1328-02

Electrical Data

Recommended wiring fuse (A) 1) 80/200 1 100 100/250 I 125 125/315 I 180 160/400 I 200 Semi-conductor fuses, if required 250 A 315 A 350 A 450 A

Power loss at rated motor load (W) 230 I 260 260 ll 290 330 1 400 440 I 470 Power consumption control card 25 VA 25 VA 25 VA 25 VA

Mechanical Data

Dimensions in mm HxWxD 320x126x260 320x126x260 400x 176x 260 400x176x260 Mounting position (Vertical/Horizontal) Vert. or Horiz. Vert. or Horiz. Vert. or Horiz. Vert. or Horiz.

Weight (kg) 6.9 6.9 12 12 Connection, busbars Cu, (bolt) 15x4 (M8) 15x4 (M8) 20x4 (M10) 20x4 (M10) Cooling system Fan Fan Fan Fan

General Electrical Data

Number of fully controlled phases 3

Voltage tolerance control Control +/- 10%

Voltage tolerance motor Motor 200-525 +/ 10%/200-690 + 5%, -10%

Recommended fuse for control card (A) Max 10 A

Frequency 50/60 Hz

Frequency tolerance +/- 10%

Relay contacts 8A, 250 V resistive load, 3A, 250 V inductive load (PF=0.4)

Type of protection/Insulation

Type of casing protection I

IP 20

Other General Data

Ambient temperatures In operation 0 - 40 °C

Max. e.g. at 80% IN 50 °C

In storage (-25) - (+70) °C

Relative air humidity 95%, non-condensing

Max. attitude without derating (See separate: Technical information 151) 1000 m

Norms/Standards, Conform to: IEC 947-4-2, EN 292, EN 60204-1, UL508

EMC, Emission EN 50081-2, (EN 50081-1 with bypass contactor)

EMC, Immunity EN 50082-2

1) Recommended wiring fuses for: Heavy (first column): ramp/direct start Normal/lJeft (second column): ramp start

NOTE! Short circuit withstand M5F075145 10000 rims A when used with K5 or RK5 fuses.

* 2-pole motor

TECHNICAL DATA 75

Ilkty

\--

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 127 of 158

3x200-525 V 50/60 Hz Model MSF-170 MSF-210 MSF-250 MSF-310 MSF-370

Soft starter rating according to AC35a, see chapter 4. page 13 50-10

heavy

3.0-30: 50-10

normal/light

5.0-30: 50-10 heavy

50-10 normal/light

5.0-30: 50-10 heavy

3.0-30: 50-10

nomtal/light

5.0-30: 50-10 heavy

3.0-30: 50-10

normal/light

5.0-30: 50-10 heavy

50-10 normal/light

Rated current of soft starter (A) 170 210 210 250 250 262 310 370 370 450 Recommended motor size (kW) for 400 V 90 110 110 132 132 160* 160 200 200 250 Recommended motor size (kW) for 525 V 110 132 132 160 160 200* 200 250 250 315 Order no. for supply voltage (100-240V) 01-1309-11 01-1310-11 01-1311-11 01-1312-01 01-1313-01 Order no. for supply voltage (380-550V) 01-1309-12 01-1310-12 01-1311-12 01-1312-02 01. 1313-02

3x200-690 V 50/60 Hz Model MSF-170 MSF-210 MSF-250 MSF-310 MSF-370

Rated current of soft starter (A) 170 210 210 250 250 262 310 370 370 450 Motor power for 690 V 160 200 200 250 250 250 315 355 355 400 Order no. for supply voltage (100-240V) 01-1329-01 01-1330-01 01-1331-01 01-1332-01 01-1333-01 Order no. for supply voltage (380-550V) 01-1329-02 01-1330-02 01-1331-02 01-1332-02 01-1333-02

Electrical Data

Recommended wiring fuse (A) 1) 200/4001 200 250/4001 315 250/5001 315 315/6301 400 400/8001 500 Semi-conductor fuses, if required 700 A 700 A 700 A 800 A 1000 A

Power loss at rated motor load (W) 510 1 630 630 1 750 750 W 930 I 1100 1100 1 1535 Power consumption control card 35 VA 35 VA 35 VA 35 VA 35 VA

Mechanical Data

Dimensions mm HxWx D in brackets 500x260x260 500x260x260 500x260x260 532x547x278 532x 547x278 Mounting position (Vertical/Horizontal) Vert. or Horiz. Vert. or Horiz. Vert. or Horiz. Vert. or Horiz. Vert. or Horiz. Weight (kg) 20 20 20 42 46 Connection, Busbars Al/Cu (bolt) 30x4 (M10) 30x4 (M10) 30x4 (M10) 40x8 (M12) 40x8 (M12) Cooling system Fan Fan Fan Fan Fan

General Electrical Data

Number of fully controlled phases 3

Voltage tolerance control Control +/- 10%

Voltage tolerance motor Motor 200-525 +/- 10%/200-690 + 5%, -10%

Recommended fuse for control card (A) Max 10 A

Frequency 50/60 Hz

Frequency tolerance +/- 10%

Relay contacts 8A, 250 V resistive load, 3A, 250 V inductive load (PF=0.4)

Type of protection/Insulation

Type of casing protection IP 20

Other General Data

Ambient temperatures In operation 0 - 40 °C

Max. e.g. at 80% IN 50 °C

In storage (-25) - (+70) °C

Relative air humidity 95%, non-condensing

Max. altitude without derating (See separate: Technical information 151) 1000 m

Norms /Standards, Conform to: IEC 947-4-2, EN 292, EN 602041, (UL508, only MSF-170 to MSF-250)

EMC, Emission EN 50081-2, (EN 50081-1 with bypass contactor) EMC, Immunity EN 50082-2

1) Recommended wiring fuses for: Heavy (first column): ramp/direct start Normal/Light (second column): ramp start

NOTEI Short circuit withstand MSF170-250 18000 rms A when used with KS or RK5 fuses.

* 2-pole motor

76 TECHNICAL DATA

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 128 of 158

3x200-525V 50/60Hz Model MSF450 MSF-570 MSF-710 MSF-835 MSF-1000 MSF-1400

Soft starter rating according to AC35a, see chapter 4. page 13

5.0-30: 50-10 heavy

3.0-30: 50-10

normal/ light

5.0-30:

-...- heavy

3.0-30: 50-10

normal/ 5.0-30: ,i0 heavy

3.0-30: 50-10

normal/ 5.0-30: n..n '""" heavy

3.0-30: 50-10

normal/ 5.0-30: c,., heavy

3.0-30: 50-10

norml/ light

5.0-30: cn_, n

heavy

3.0-30: 50-10

noral/ flight

Rated current of soft starter (A) 450 549 570 710 710 835 835 960 1000 1125 1400 1650 Recommended motor size (kW) for 400 V 250 315 315 400 400 450 450 560 560 630 800 930 Recommended motor size (kW) for 525 V 315 400 400 500 500 560 600 630 660 710 1000 250 Order no. for supply voltage (100-240V) 01-1341-01 01-1315-01 01-1316-01 01-1317-01 01-1318-01 01-1319-01 Order no. for supply voltage (380-550V) 01-1314-02 01-1315-02 01-1316-02 01-1317-02 01-1318-02 01-1319-02

3x200-690V 50/60Hz Model MSF450 MSF -570 MSF-710 MSF-835 MSF-1000 MSF-1400 Rated current of soft starter (A) 450 549 570 640 710 835 835 880 1000 1125 1400 1524 Motor power for 690 V 400 560 560 630 710 800 800 1000 1120 1400 1600 Order no. for supply voltage (100-240V) 01-1334-01 01-1335-01 01-1336-01 01-1337-01 01-1338-01 01-1339-01 Order no. for supply voltage (380-550V) 01-1334-02 01-1335-02 01-1336-02 01-1337-02 01-1338-02 01-1339-02

Electrical Data

Recommended wiring fuse (A 1) 500/1 k I 630 630/1 k 1 800 800/1 Ic1 1 k 1 k/1.2 kl 1 k 1k/1.4 kl 1.2 k 1.4 k/1.8 II 1.8 k Semi-conductor fuses, if required 1250 A 1250 A 1800 A 2500 A 3200 A 4000 A

Power loss at rated motor load (W) 1400 I 1730 1700 I 2100 2100 1 2500 2500 I 2875 3000 1 3375 4200 1 4950 Power consumption control card 35 VA 35 VA 35 VA 35 VA 35 VA 35 VA

Mechanical Data

Dimensions mm HxWxD incl. brackets 532x547x278 687x640x302 687x640x302 687x640x302 900x875x336 900x875x336 Mounting position (Vertical/Horizontal) Vert. or Horiz. Vert. or Horiz Vert. or Horiz. Vert. or Horiz. Vert. or Horiz. Vert. or Horiz. Weight (kg) 46 64 78 80 175 175 Connection, Busbars Al (bolt) 40x8 (M12) 40x10 (M12) 40x10 (M12) 40x10 (M12) 75x10 (M12) 75x10 (M12) Cooling system Fan Fan Fan Fan Fan Fan

General Electrical Data

Number of fully controlled phases 3

Voltage tolerance control Control +/- 10%

Voltage tolerance motor Motor 200-525 +/- 10%/200-690 + 5%, -10%

Recommended fuse for control card (A) Max 10 A

Frequency 50/60 Hz

Frequency tolerance +/- 10%

Relay contacts 8A, 250 V resistive load, 3A, 250 V inductive load (PF=0.4)

Type of protection/Insulation

Type of casing protection I

IP 20 I

IPOO

Other General Data

Ambient temperatures In operation 0.40 °C

Max. e.g. at 80% IN 50 °C

In storage (-25) - (+70) °C

Relative air humidity 95%, non-condensing

Max. altitude without derating (See separate: Technical information 151) 1000 m

Norma /Standards, Conform to: IEC 947-4-2, EN 292, EN 60204-1

EMC, Emission EN 50081-2, (EN 50081-1 with bypass contactor) EMC, Immunity EN 50082-2

1) Recommended wiring fuses for: Heavy (first column): ramp/direct start Normal /Light (second column): ramp start

TECHNICAL DATA 77

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 129 of 158

Semi-conductor fuses Always use standard commercial fuses to protect the wiring and prevent short circuiting. To protect the thy- ristors against short-circuit currents, superfast semicon- ductor fuses can be used if preferred (e.g. Bussmann type FWP or similar, see table below).

The normal guarantee is valid even if superfast semiconductor fuses are not used.

Type FWP Bussmann fuse

A 1

2 t (fuse) x 1000

M SF-017 80 2.4 M SF-030 125 7.3 M SF-045 150 11.7 M SF-060 200 22 M SF-075 250 42.5 M SF-085 300 71.2 M SF-110 350 95.6 M SF-145 450 137

M SF-170B 700 300 M SF-210B 700 300 M SF-250B 800 450 M SF-310 800 450 M SF-370 1000 600 M SF-450 1200 2100 M SF-570 1400 2700 M SF-710 1800 5300 M SF-835 2000 M SF-1000 2500 M SF-1400 3500

78 TECHNICAL DATA

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 130 of 158

13. SET-UP MENU LIST

nMumbeenu r Function/Parameter Range Par.set Factory ttin se g Value Page

001 Initial voltage at start 25 - 90% of U 1- 4 30 page 36 002 Start time ramp 1 1- 60 sec 1- 4 10 page 36 003 Step down voltage at stop 100 - 40% U 1- 4 100 page 36 004 Stop time ramp 1 oFF, 2 - 120 sec 1- 4 oFF page 36 005 Current 0.0 - 9999 Amp page 36 006 Control mode 1, 2, 3 1- 4 2 page 37 007 Extended functions & metering oFF, on oFF page 38

008 Extended functions oFF, on oFF page 38

011 Initial voltage start ramp 2 30 - 90% U 1- 4 90 page 38 012 Start time ramp 2 oFF, 1- 60 sec 1- 4 oFF page 38 013 Step down voltage stop ramp 2 100 - 40% U 1- 4 40 page 38 014 Stop time ramp 2 oFF, 2 - 120 sec 1- 4 oFF page 38

016 Initial torque at start 0 - 250% Tn 1- 4 10 page 39 017 End torque at start 50 - 250% Tn 1- 4 150 page 39 018 End torque at stop 0-100% Tn 1- 4 0 page 39 020 Voltage ramp with current limit at start oFF, 150 - 500% In 1- 4 oFF page 39 021 Current limit at start oFF, 150 - 500% In 1- 4 oFF page 40 022 Pump control oFF, on 1- 4 oFF page 40 023 Remote analogue control oFF, 1, 2 1- 4 oFF page 41 024 Full voltage start D.O.L oFF, on 1- 4 oFF page 41 025 Torque control oFF, 1, 2 1- 4 oFF page 42

030 Torque boost active time oFF, 0.1 - 2.0 sec 1- 4 oFF page 43 031 Torque boost current limit 300 - 700% In 1- 4 300 page 43 032 Bypass oFF, on 1- 4 oFF page 43 033 Power Factor Control PFC oFF, on 1- 4 oFF page 46 034 Brake active time oFF, 1 - 120 sec 1- 4 oFF page 47 035 Braking strength 100 - 500% 1- 4 100 page 47

036 Braking methods 1, 2 1- 4 1 page 47 037 Slow speed torque 10 - 100 1- 4 10 page 49 038 Slow speed time at start oFF, 1- 60 sec 1- 4 oFF page 49 039 Slow speed time at stop oFF, 1- 60 sec 1- 4 oFF page 49 040 DC-Brake at slow speed oFF, 1-60 sec 1- 4 oFF page 49

041 Nominal motor voltage 200 - 700 V 1- 4 400 page 50

042 Nominal motor current 25-150% Insoft in Amp 1- 4 Insoft in Amp page 50

043 Nominal motor power 25 - 300% of Pnsoft in kW 1- 4 Pnsoft in kW page 50

044 Nominal speed 500 - 3600 rpm 1- 4 Nnsoft in rpm page 50 045 Nominal power factor 0.50 - 1.00 1- 4 0.86 page 50 046 Nominal frequency 50, 60 Hz 50 page 50

SET-UP MENU LIST 79

le Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 131 of 158

Of)

enu nuMmber Function/Parameter Range Par.set

Factory setting Value Page

051 Programmable relay K1 1, 2, 3, (4), 5 1 page 51 052 Programmable relay K2 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 2 page 51

054 Analogue output oFF, 1, 2 1- 4 oFF page 52 055 Analogue output value 1, 2, 3 1- 4 1 page 52 056 Scaling analogue output 5 - 150% 1- 4 100 page 52 057 Digital input selection oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4 1- 4 oFF page 53 058 Digital input pulses 1-100 1- 4 1 page 53

061 Parameter set 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 1 page 54

071 Motor PTC input no, YES no page 55 072 Internal motor thermal protection class oFF, 2 - 40 sec 10 page 55 073 Used thermal capacity 0 - 150% page 55 074 Starts per hour limitation oFF, 1- 99/hour 1- 4 oFF page 55 075 Locked rotor alarm oFF, 1.0 - 10.0 sec 1- 4 oFF page 55

081 Voltage unbalance alarm 2 - 25% Un 1- 4 10 page 56 082 Response delay voltage unbalance alarm oFF, 1- 60 sec 1- 4 oFF page 56 083 Over voltage alarm 100 - 150% Un 1- 4 115 page 56 084 Response delay over voltage alarm oFF, 1- 60 sec 1- 4 oFF page 56 085 Under voltage alarm 75 -100% Un 1- 4 85 page 57 086 Response delay under voltage alarm oFF, 1- 60 sec 1- 4 oFF page 57 087 Phase sequence L123, L321 page 57 088 Phase reversal alarm oFF, on oFF page 57

089 Auto set power limits no, YES no page 57 090 Output shaft power 0.0 - 200.0% Pn page 57 091 Start delay power limits 1- 250 sec 1- 4 10 page 58 092 Max power alarm limit 5 - 200% Pn 1- 4 115 page 58 093 Max alarm response delay oFF, 0.1 - 25.0 sec 1- 4 oFF page 58 094 Max power pre-alarm limit 5 - 200% Pn 1- 4 110 page 58 095 Max pre-alarm response delay oFF, 0.1 - 25.0 sec 1- 4 oFF page 58 096 Min pre-alarm power limit 5 - 200% Pn 1- 4 90 page 58 097 Min pre-alarm response delay oFF, 0.1 - 25.0 sec 1- 4 oFF page 59 098 Min power alarm limit 5 - 200%Pn 1- 4 85 page 59 099 Min alarm response delay oFF, 0.1 - 25.0 sec 1- 4 oFF page 59

101 Run at single phase input failure no, YES 1- 4 no page 61 102 Run at current limit time-out no, YES 1- 4 no page 61

103 Jog forward enable oFF, on 1- 4 oFF page 61 104 Jog reverse enable oFF, on 1- 4 oFF page 61

105 Automatic return menu oFF, 1-999 oFF page 62

111 Serial comm. unit address 1- 247 1 page 62 112 Serial comm. baudrate 2.4 - 38.4 kBaud 9.6 page 62

80 SET-UP MENU LIST

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 132 of 158

nMumenu ber Function/Parameter Range Par.set Factory se fting Value Page

113 Serial comm. parity 0, 1 0 page 62 114 Serial comm. contact broken oFF, 1, 2 1 page 62

199 Reset to factory settings no, YES no page 63

201 Current 0.0 - 9999 Amp page 63 202 Line main voltage 0 - 720 V page 63 203 Output shaft power -9999 - 9999 kW page 63 204 Power factor 0.00 - 1.00 page 63 205 Power consumption 0.000 - 2000 MWh page 63 206 Reset power consumption no, YES no page 64 207 Shaft torque -9999 - 9999 Nm page 64 208 Operation time Hours page 64

211 Current phase L1 0.0 - 9999 Amp page 64 212 Current phase L2 0.0 - 9999 Amp page 64 213 Current phase L3 0.0 - 9999 Amp page 64

214 Line main voltage L1- L2 0 - 720 V page 64 215 Line main voltage L1- L3 0 - 720 V page 64 216 Line main voltage L2 - L3 0 - 720 V page 64

221 Locked keyboard info no, YES no page 65

901 Alarm list, Latest error Fl - F16 page 65 902 -915 Alarm list, Older error in chronological order Fl - F16 page 65

Explanation of units: U Input line voltage Un Nominal motor voltage.

Nominal motor current. Nominal motor power. Nominal motor speed. Nominal shaft torque. Nominal current soft starter. Nominal power soft starter. Nominal speed soft starter.

Calculation shaft torque

In Pn Nn Tn Insoft Pnsoft Nnsoft

T = - Pn 0x270

NOTE The six main functions for motor control, menus 020-025, can only be selected one at a time.

SET-UP MENU LIST 81

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 133 of 158

14. INDEX

Numerics Device connections 28, 31 Keyboard lock 23, 65 2-wire start/stop 37 different operation situation 22 keys 23 3-wire start/stop 37 Digital inputs 32

Dimension 25, 74 L A DIN VDE 0100 24 LED display 22 Above max power limit 67 Direct On Line start 41 Live circuit components 24 Alarm category 67 Dismantling 2 Load monitor 57 Alarm list 65 Display next window 23 Locked rotor 67 Alarm reset 23 Display previous window 23 Low load 20 Ambient temperatures . 10, 77

20, 74, 75, Dual voltage ramp 38

M analogue control 32 E

Main functions 81 Analogue input 32, 41 Electrical characteristic 32 Mains contactor 10 Analogue output 32, 52 Electrical Data 74, 75, 76, 77 Mains supply 28, 31 Analogue output gain 52 EMC 74, 75, 76, 77 Mains voltage 10 Analogue output value 52 Emergency 2 MAINTENANCE 71 Auto set power limits 57 End torque 39 Matrix 19 automatic reset 37 Max power alarm limit 58 Automatic return menu 62 F Max power pre-alarm limit 58

Factory settings 63 Max pre-alarm response delay 58 B Features 9 Mechanical Data 74, 75, 76, 77 Basic parameter setting 10 Forward/reverse 34 Menu Below min power limit 67 Free circulation of air 24 001 36 Brake method 47 frequency 50 002 11, 36 Braking Strenght 47 Frequency inverter 20 003 36 Braking time 46 Front cover 21 004 11, 36 Busbars 25, 26 Full speed not reached 67 005 12, 36 Bypass 43 Full voltage 51 006 12, 37 Bypass contactor 44 Full voltage start 41 007 38

Function 79 008 38 C 011 38

Cabinet 24 G 012 38

Checklist 10 General Data 74 013 38 Clickson thermistor 32 General description 21 014 38

Combination matrix 19 016 39

Complaint 7 H 017 39

Confirm setting 23 Heat dissipation 20 020 39

Connections 28, 32 High ambient temperatures 43 021 40

Control mode 23, 37 022 40 Control voltage 32 023 41

control voltage 33 Increase value 23 024 41

Control voltage connection 28, 31 Increase value of setting 23 025 42

Cooling fins 24 Initial torque 39 030 43

cos phi 50 Initial voltage at start ramp 1 36 031 43

Current 63 Initial voltage at start ramp 2 38 032 43

Current in phase Ll 64 INSPECTION AT DELIVERY 7 033 46

Current in phase L2 64 Installation 24 034 46

Current in phase L3 64 Insulation test 20 035 47

Current limit 39 036 47

Current limit time-out 61 J 037 48

Current transformer 45 JOG Forward 23, 61 038 039

49 49

D

D.O.L start DC-brake DC-Brake at slow speed

41

46 49

JOG fwd/rev JOG Reverse 23, Jumper J1 Jumper J2

23 61

41

52

040 041 042 043

49 11, 50

50 11, 50

044 11, 50 Decrease value Decrease value of setting

23 23

K

Keyboard 23 045 046

11, 50 11, 50

82 INDEX

T-

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 134 of 158

)

051 052 054 055 056 057 058 061 071 072 073 074 075 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 101

102 103 104 105 199 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 211 212 213 214 215 216 221 901 RMS current read-out

Menu expansion Menu Structure Min alarm response delay Min power alarm limit Min power pre-alarm limit Min pre-alarm response delay Minimum free space Motor

51

51

52 52

52 53 53 54 55 55

56 56 56 56 56 56 56 57 57 57 57 57 57 58 58 58 58 58 59 59 59 59 61

61

61

61

62 63 63 63 63 63 63 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64

23, 65 65 12 38 22 59 59 59 59

24, 25 31

Motor current 50 Motor data 50 Motor power 50 Motor power supply 28, 31 Motor protection, overload 55, 67 Motor shaft torque 64 Motor speed 50 Motor terminal open 67 Motor voltage 50 MOUNTING 24 MOUNTING/WIRING 24

N

Next 23 Nominal frequency 11

Nominal motor cos phi 11

Nominal motor current 11

Nominal motor power 11

Nominal motor speed 11 Norms/Standards 74, 75, 76, 77 NTC thermistor 32

0 Open thyristor 67 Operation 51 Operation time 63, 64 Operation/Set-up 23 Operator panel 21 Output motor shaftpower 63 Output shaftpower 57, 63 Over voltage 56, 67

Parallel 20 Parallel cables 73 Parameter 79 Parameter Set 32, 54 PFC 46 Phase compensation capacitor 20 Phase input failure 67 Phase loss 61 Phase reversal alarm 67 Phase sequence 57 Pole-changing contactor 20 Potentiometer 32 Power consumption 63 Power factor 63 Power Factor Control 46 Power loss 10 PPU unit 21 Pre-alarm 51, 58 Prevent damage to the thyristors ....24 Previous 23 Programmable relay 51 Programming and presentation unit (PPU) 21 protection/insulation ... 74, 75, 76, 77 Protective earth 28, 31 PTC 55 PTC Thermistor input 32 Pump control 40

Q Quick Set-up 10

R

Rating plate 10 Recyclable material 2 Regular maintenance 71 Relay K1 32, 51 Relay K2 32 Relay K3 32 Remote 23 Reset 23 reset 66 Response delay max alarm 58 RMS current 36, 63 RMS main voltage 63 Rotating loads 20 Running motors 20 Running-LED 22

S

Safety 2, 6 Safety measures 10 Scrapping 2

Selection of control mode 12 Semiconductor fuses 33, 78 Serial comm. 23 Serial communication broken 67 Shaftpower 57, 63 Shielded motor cable 20 Shorted thyristor 67 Simple soft start and soft stop 10 Slip ring motors 20 Slow blow fuses 33 Slow speed time at start 49 Slow speed time at stop 49 Slow speed torque 48 Small motor 20 Softbrake 51

Softstart overheated 67 Spare parts 2 standard commercial fuses 78 Standard wiring 10, 33 Standards 6 Start command 22 Start delay power limits 58 Start ramp 1 36 Start ramp 2 38 Start the motor 12 Start time ramp 1 11

Start/Stop 12, 23 Start/stop combination 19 Start/stop/reset from keyboard 12

Start/stop-LED 22 Starting 12

STARTING/OPERATING 79 Starts per hour 67 Starts per hour limitation 56 Step down voltage in stop ramp 2 38 Step down voltage stop ramp 1 36 Stop command 22 Stop ramp 1 36

INDEX 83

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 135 of 158

Stop ramp time 2 38 Stop time ramp 1 11

storage 7 Supply voltage switch

32, 74 2

Switch the device off 2 Switch-off procedures 2

T

TECHNICAL DATA 74 Terminal 32 Terminal clamp 78 Terminals 32 Thermal capacity 56 Thermal protection 55 Tightening torque 25 Torque boost active time 43 Torque boost current limit 43 Torque booster 43 Torque control 42 Trained personnel 2, 10 Transport 7 TROUBLESHOOTING 68 Two speed motor 20

U

Under voltage 57, 67 Unpacking 7

V

VIEW OPERATION 63 Voltage 63 Voltage unbalance 56, 67

Weight 74 Wiring circuit 33 Wiring example 34

84 INDEX

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 136 of 158

i

REPRESENTATION

ADL Co. P.O. Box 47 12 50 40 MOSCOW Russia Tel. 00007- 095268 7423 Fax 00007- 095268 0348 [email protected]

AUTOMATECH Sp.zo.o ul. Ry-zowa 84 PL-02482 OPACZ-KOLONIA Poland Tel. 0048- 22-723 06 62 Fax 0048- 22-723 06 06 [email protected]

Elimko 8. Cadde 68. Sokak Nr. 16 06510 Emek-ANKARA Turkey Tel. 0090 - 312 212 64 50 Fax 0090 - 312 212 41 43

Elpro Drive , S. R. 0. ul. Miru 3 CZ 73961 TRINEC Tjeckien Republic Tel. 00420W 659434661 Fax 00420W 659325864 [email protected]

Emotron AB Box 222 25 SE-250 24 HELSINGBORG Sweden Tel. +46 42 169900 Fax +46 42 169949 [email protected]

Emotron Antriebssysteme GmbH Goethestrasse 6 38855 WERNIGERODE Germany Tel. 0049- 3943 92050 Fax 0049- 3943 92055 [email protected]

Emotron B.V. P.O. Box 132 5531 NX BLADEL Holland Tel. 0031- 497 389222 Fax 0031- 497 386275 [email protected]

Emotron Drives (UK) Ltd Spaces Business Centre Radway Green Park Alsager Cheshire CW2 5PR Great Britain Tel. 0044- 1270 879440 Fax 0044- 1270 886119 [email protected]

Emotron El-F1 SA Arlbau 229 ES-08021 BARCELONA Spain Tel. 0034- 93 209 14 99 Fax 0034- 93 209 12 45 [email protected]

Emotron Inc 3440 Granite Circle TOLEDO, OH 43617 USA Tel. 001- (419) 841-7774 Fax 001- (419) 843-5816 [email protected]

Emsby 27 Rodwell Street QUE - 4108 ARCHERFIELD Australia Tel. 0061- 7 3274 2566 Fax 0061- 7 3274 2387 [email protected]

Esquire Engineering sdn bhd 13, JIn Jurutera U1/23, Seksyen U1 Hicom-Glenmarie Industrial Park 40000 Shah Alam SELANGOR Malaysia Tel. 0060- 3 519 1958 Fax 0060- 3 519 1960 [email protected]

HEDT EC OY

P.O.B 110 SF-00201 HELSINGFORS Finland Tel. 00358- 9 682881 Fax 00358- 9 674918 [email protected]

Ingenior Ivar Pettersen ASPostboks 166 N-3001 DRAMMEN Norway Tel. 0047- 32 21 21 21 Fax 0047- 32 21 21 99 [email protected]

K.K. El-Fi 2-184 Hagoromocho 1900021 Tachakawa J- TOKYO Japan Tel. 0081- 42 528 8820 Fax 0081- 42 528 8821 [email protected]

MAS for Eng. & Trad From Tahreer St 12, a-Abee Erna-ma St. DOKKI GIZA

Egypt Tel. 0020- 2 3357947 Fax 0020- 2 3357948

Mohamad Eid Kari Marjeh -square, Euphorat st. Dagestani Bld. 1st. Fl. POB 31203 DAMASKUS Syria Tel. 00963- 11 222 3867 Fax 00963- 11 224 5425

Pardis International Golbarg W. Kerman S. Rahmati E. No.202 TEHERAN Iran Tel. 0098- 21 7838571 Fax 0098- 21 7838571 [email protected]

Saftronics (PTY) LTD

27 Heronmere Road P 0 Box 38045 2016 BOOYSENS South Africa Tel. 0027- 11 434 1345 Fax 0027- 11 434 1359 [email protected]

TENSON Engineering Ltd Room 908, Nan Fung Commercial Center 19 LAM LOK St KOWLOON BAY Hong Kong Tel. +852 2758 0878 Fax +852 2759 5335 [email protected]

WELLFORD CHILE S.A. ENCA LA 103645 Madrid No 1602 - Santiago SANTIAGO Chile Tel. 0056- 2 556 26 55 Fax 0056- 2 556 35 28 [email protected]

Voltampere s.a. 2nd klm Lagada-Redina GR-57200 THESSALONIKI Greece Tel. 0030- 394 26188 Fax 0030- 394 26189 [email protected]

www.emotron.com

85

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 137 of 158

TECHNICAL DATA SHEET

For

OCU NO.1 MCC

Equipment Type: Modbus Interface

Location: Starter Sections

Model Numbers: MSF-017

Manufacturer: Emotron

Supplier: Emsby Pty Ltd P.O.Box 954 Archerfield Qld, 4108 Tel: 3274 2566 Fax:3274 2387

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 138 of 158

3.2 Installation of MSF-170 to MSF-1400

NOTE! Under construction, to be defined.

3.3 RS485 Multipoint network The RS485 port (see Fig. 4) is used for multi point communi- cation. A host computer (PC/PLC) can address (master) maxi- mum 247 slave stations (nodes). See Fig. 7.

BUS MASTER

RS 035

VFB

Id 1

MSF

Id 2 VFX

Id

F10

Fig. 7 RS 485 mulitpoint network

3.3.1 RS485 connection

Table 25 RS485 pinning

RS485 pin Function

1 Ground

2 A-line

3 B-line

4 PE

The connector is a 4-pole male connector. The wiring should be done according to Fig. 8.

SOFTSTARTER MSF DATA 31

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 139 of 158

Mater Slave 1 Ban e 2

Canneartlan to Rid tun R7U Haat PC/ PLC

Male ao nnearto to on Mad too BTU o plan Gado

Fig. 8 RS485 wiring

3.3.2 RS485 termination. The RS485 network must always be terminated, to avoid trans- mission problem. The termination must take place at the end of the network. In Fig. 8 this means that the termination must take place at the slave 2 unit.

Switch Si (see Fig. 4) sets the termination ON or OFF as indicated in the Fig. 9 and Fig. 10.

F14

F15

Fig. 9 Termination is OFF.

Fig. 10 Termination is ON.

NOTE! Physical connection can be either RS232 or RS485, not both on the same time.

32 SOFTSTARTER MSF DATA

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 140 of 158

3.4 RS232 point to point network The RS232 port is used for point to point communication as a master slave. See fig Fig. 11.

PC RS232 Ennotron product

F13

Fig. 11 RS232 point to point network

3.4.1 RS232 connection

Table 26 RS232 pinning

RS232 pin Function

2 TX from module

3 RX to module

5 Ground

3.4.2 RS232 wiring The RS232 port consists of a sub-D 9 pole female connector. The wiring should be done according to Fig. 11.

NOTE! Use an 1:1 cable WITHOUT a pin 2.3 crossing.

SOFTSTARTER MSF DATA 33

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 141 of 158

Fig. 12 RS232 wiring.

Fernadepoileginr DI Mod!! to BTU °piing aard

NOTE! Physical connection can be either RS232 or RS485, not both on the same time.

3.5 Set-up Communication Parameters for Softstarter MSF

The following parameters have to be set-up: - Unit address. - Baud rate. - Parity - Behaviour when contact broken.

Setting up the communication parameter must be made in local 'Keyboard control' mode. See 3.6.1, page 38.

34 SOFTSTARTER MSF DATA

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 142 of 158

SI 0

0

0

1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 9- 10 I 11 I 12 I 13 I " 14 I 15 16

LEWORTHY STREET - WP22 WATER PUMP STATION ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS

r ELECTRICAL DRAWING LIST

N

DRAWING NUMBER TITLE

486/4/7-JM001 DRAWING INDEX

486/4/7-JM002 MAIN SWITCHBOARD INCOMER SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM

486/4/7-JM003 MAIN SWITCHBOARD SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM

486/4/7-JM004 BASIC TRANSFER SWITCH SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

486/4/7-JM005 PUMP 1 SOFT STARTER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

486/4/7-JM006 PUMP 2 SOFT STARTER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

486/4/7-JM007 MAIN SWITCHBOARD GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

486/4/7-JM008 MAIN SWITCHBOARD TERMINATION DIAGRAM

486/4/7-JM009 GENERATOR CONNECTION BOX GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

486/4/7-JM010 PUMP STATION GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

486/4/7-JM011 PUMP STATION SECTION A

486/4/7-JM012 PUMP STATION SECTION B if

AS CONSTRUCTED -.'S.

C 03.08.04 AS CONSTRUCTED B 17-10-03 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION R.K. A 8-8-03 ISSUED FOR -FENDER RK

`No DATE AMENDMENT INITIALS/

DATE PRODUCTION / NETWORK DELEGATE

MANAGER DATE ENGINEERING K.LAM. 28-7-03

PRINCIPAL R.P.E.Q. NO. DATE ENGINEER A.MOONEY. 5596 7-03

JOB FILE - 'DAD FILE 47JM001-RevC.dwa _

DESIGN R.K. 2-7-03

A * DESIGN CHECK A.M. 7-03

DRAWN H.T.

1207_033 -1 "-.--bane lality DRAFTING CHECK R.K. Brisbane

Brisbanwateer--, Engineering

.;j

PROJECT

LEWORTHY STREET WP22 WATER PUMP STATION SWITCHBOARD UPGRADE

MAIN SWITCHBOARD

DRAWING SCHEDULE

SCALE NTS

A.H. DATUM

° 1 OF 1

DRAWING N°

486/4/7-JM001 1 2 3

I 4

I 5

1 6 I 7

I 8 1 9 10 11 12 I 13 I 14 I 15 I 16

SHEETS

AMEND.

C

E

F

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 143 of 158

1 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 6 7 8 9 10 ' I 11 12 I 13 14 15 I 16

E N R

1

1

B

1

t1.1 MAIN

ISOLATOR

4-00A

ENERGEX CT METERING

COMPARTMENT

ENERGEX METER

1 -1 PANEL OUTSIDE PUMP

STATION WALL'

L_.______1

01

----1, 6A

MAIN SWITCH 1

400A

MONITORING RELAY CROMTON

2S2 -PSGW

MAIN SWITCH

2 400A

WALL MOUNTED

GENERATOR CONNECTION i

BOX (REFER DRG

486/4/7-JM009)

NR W B

CONTINUED ON ORG.

486/4/7-M005

Q2

6A X.1....C,

- - 7 PHASE FAILURE. RELAY x L...0

1 --1--43

1 CROMPTON

ID 252-PSGW

30 SPO

SPARE

10A 10 GPO MOUNTED

ON ESCUTCHEON

GENERATOR 240v

CONTROL b TERMINATION DIAGRAM

I REFER DRGS. 486/4/7-M004 E.

486/4/7-1M007.

x 051 32A

or"

Or c-x

R

1

W

10

B

2

3

11

12

X 052 16A

z...-

0T-x1:152 10A

054 32A

Q55

4

S

13

056 6A x Q57 6A x 058 6A

059

SPACE

6

14

7

15

16 060

8

9

17 .061

18 062 6A X

SPACE

SPACE.

SPACE

GPO END BOARD & 1 IN ROOM

PUMP STATION INTERNAL LIGHTS

DISTRIBUTION BOARD SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM

RTU SUPPLY

BTS COMPARTMENT LIGHT

MARSHALLING CUBICLE LIGHT _

PUMP 1 STARTER COMPARTMENT LIGHT

PUMP 2 STARTER COMPARTMENT LIGHT

1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 6 7 9 12 13

AS CONSTRUCTED

C 03.08.04 AS CONSTRUCTED B 17-10-03 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION R.K. A 8-8-03 ISSUED FOR TENDER HT No DATE AMENDMENT INITIALS

PRODUCTION P I NETWORK DELEGATE

DATE

MANAGER ENGINEERING K.LAM

DATE 28-7-03

PRINCIPAL ENGINEER A.MOONEY.

R.P.E.Q. NO. 5596

DATE 7-03

JOB FILE - N

CAD FILE 47JM002-RevC.dwg I DESIGN

DESIGN CHECK

DRAWN

DRAFTING CHECK

R.K. 25-6-03

AM. 7-03

H.T. 26-6-03

R.K. 10-7-03 Brisbane City

Brisbane ProJects Engi

PROJECT

LEWORTHY STREET WP22 WATER PUMP STATION SWITCHBOARD UPGRADE

>TITLE

MAIN SWITCHBOARD INCOMER

SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM

JSCALE NTS

A.H. DATUM

1 OF 1

DRAWING N°

486/4/7-J M 002 SHEETS

AMEND.

C

14 I 15 I 16

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 144 of 158

F

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

504221 ENERGEX

TRANSFORMER

300kVA 415V

0:1

SUPPLY AUTHORITY MFRG. PANEL

TARIFF 22 ; GENERATOR

ENERGEX I

kW1ir

WALL MOUNTED

I. TERMINAL BOX I. I, RTU

; I 1 H-r -1- _ i 1 -.1 I DI ,;1

EXISTING r_i

.. ail . 0 0 ILI

M Cr I..-

Cr -

CC I-

1.3 I

,I, a. i %-.1 I I

4. 4 1 - 4C 300mml ..t: :

(1)--2 - 4C 240mry IJ A-I

I- I

i

4:, + T 4..

400A 1 1

1 1

1 I

L.

400/300/200/SA ENERGEX METERING

6A MPFR MONITORING RELAY

.INCOMER.

PANEL

TRANSFER SWITCH MS1 MS2 \i<

..)0 400A 400A

- -r -r -+

400A BUSBARS 2SkA FOR 1 SEC

L

.20

MEN

LINK

0 200/63A

NEUTRAL

* 02 6A

-EARTH 4

r---- x -

), a.0 400A 250A

415V LIGHT & POWER

015 TRIBUTION

BOARD

486/4/7-M002

18 POLE 250A CHASSIS

1,2,3 10 5 18 11 12 6

32A I

Q52 16A

Q53

10A

055 as6 0.57 Q

10SA

8

20A 16A

%_J it X X

04 QS

400A 63A 250A

SOFT

STARTER

PUMP 1 PUMP 2

110kW 110kW 195A FLC 195A FLC

SOFT

STARTER

3 1C 95mo/ PVC/PVC 1 - 35onw NEUTRAL PVC/PVC

486/4/7-JMOO5 486/4/7-JM006

I

0 0 c- I, 11- O. ...., ......1

In 4..0 ' '

N .

VI EX II VI CL

en

1.1.1

a.

062 6A

1 3 I

4 I

5 I

6 I

7 I 8 9 I 10 I 11 I 12 13

FOR SWITCHBOARD LAYOUT

SEE DRG.-4136/4/1-114008

I

AS CONSTRUCTED

C 03.08.04 AS CONSTRUCTED B 17-10-03 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION R.K. A 8-8-03 ISSUED FOR TENDER HT

t,No DATE AMENDMENT INITIALS

' PRODUCTION / NETWORK . DATE DELEGATE

MANAGER DATE ENGINEERING KLAM 28-7-03

PRINCIPAL R.P.E.Q. NO. DATE ENGINEER A.MOONEY. 5596 7-03

JOB FILE - I CAD FILE 47JM003-RevC.dwg

.? DESIGN R.K 25-6-03

-4. DESIGN CHECK A.M. 7-03

DRAWN H.T. 26-6-03 rig -- 1Tin.

,DRAFTING CHECK R.K 10-7-03 Brisbane City

Projects -: Watere I 01% I II I I

LEWORTHY STREET WP22 WATER PUMP STATION SWITCHBOARD UPGRADE

-1IITAIEN SWITCHBOARD

SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM

SCALE NTS

A.H. DATUM

N° 1 OF 1 SHEETS

DRAWING N°

486/4/7-J M003 AMEND.

C

14 15 16

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 145 of 158

sr 0 0

kb

cc

0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

601

X6-01

604

X6-04 605

.0 X6-05

606

X6-06 607

.er X6-07

X6-08

X6-09

608

GFAILED

b

GFAULT

GFUELL

b

GRUNNING

115 A

609

610

MPFR-1

X6-10

.0" 611

X6-11 612

ATS-MS1 .

108 -----01113

X6-12 613

X6-13

X6-14

614

ATS-MS2

lOR - 011R

615

X6-15

far X6-16

616

GRSTART

11 -----014

.0" X6-17

617

618

GRSTOP

X6-18

X6-19 620

X6-20 621

X6-21 622

.er X6-22

0 GAUT°.

xl V x2

GCONN

b

GOPEN

GCBT

COMMON 24vdc -ve

GENERATOR FAILED RLY 9

GENERATOR FAULT RLY 10

GENERATOR LOW FUEL RLY 11

GENERATOR RUNNING RLY 12

GENERATOR RUNNING INDICATOR

GENERATOR CONNECTED RLY 13

MAINS FAILURE

MAINS ATS STATUS

GENERATOR ATS STATUS

REMOTE START SIGNAL

REMOTE STOP SIGNAL

GENERATOR CANOPY DOORS OPEN

GENERATOR NOT IN AUTO MODE

GENERATOR MCCB TRIPPED

2

3

4

6

7

8

RTU 24Vdc FROM RTU CONTROL PANEL

> RTU-dim3.00 < dim3.01 8 8

10 > RTU-4im3.01 <

11 > RTU-dim3.02 <

12 > RTU-dim3.03 <

13 > RTU-dim3.04 <

14 > RTU-dim1.6 <

dim3.00 7 7

IS

16 > RTU-dim1.7 <

17

20

dim3.02 9 9

dim3.03 10 10

dim3 .04 11

dim1.6

x2

H4

xl

dim1.7

12 12 - 13

14 14

15 15

dam 1.11

21 < RTU-domI.11 - 22

23. > RTU-dim1.15 <

26

16 16

dim1.15

dorsi° 27 < RTUzdam1.0 - 28

29

30

31

32

33

CONTINUED ON DRG.

486/4/7-H1005

GOPEN

GAUTO

GMCBT

/7 17

GFAILED

GFAULT

t4- 1l

GFUELL

GRUNNING

14

GCONN

14 MPFR-2 22'

40

0 GENERATOR FAILED

GENERATOR FAULT

GENERATOR LOW FUEL

GENERATOR RUNNING

GENERATOR CONNECTED

MAINS POWER FAILURE

NORMAL SUPPLY ON INDICATOR

MAINS POWER ON

24

PFR-1

14 _011

GRSTART

b

GRSTOP

b

R L

0 # 0 CONT. ON LINE 106

19 19 H6 A

40

41

42

GENERATOR REMOTE START 20

0 GENERATOR REMOTE STOP 22

xl x2

PUMP STATION REMOTE

SELECTED

(RTU CABINET) SITE ATTENTION ALARM RESET P/B (SWE3D)

SITE ATTENTION INDICATOR

"-) x - FLASHING LIGHT ON WALL

34

35

36

37

3 7 9 10 11

OUTPUTS CONNECTED TO THE .RTU TERMINALS ONLY.1NOT CONNECTED

TO RTU - PROVISION FOR FUTURE CONTROL

12 13

SYMBOLS LEGEND

> ???_?I??? <= INPUT

< 777_70777 >. OUTPUT

C..91-XX

= I/O ADDRESS

A=ANALOG, 0=DIGITAL

RTU=REMOTE TERMINATION UNIT,

= EXTERNAL WIRING

= FUSED TERMINALS ( 0.IA U.N.O. (MARSHALLING CUBICLE)

O = LINK TERMINALS (MARSHALLING CUBICLE)

= TERMINALS

= FIELD TERMINALS

AS CONSTRUCTED

C 03.08.04 AS CO NJ Si-Fzuc-ra ID B 17-10-03 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION R.K.

A 8-8-03 ISSUED FOR TENDER HT No DATE AMENDMENT INITIALS

PRODUCTION I NETWORK DATE DELEGATE

MANAGER DATE ENGINEERING KLAN 28-7-03

PRINCIPAL R.P.E.Q. NO. . DATE ENGINEER A.MOONEY. 5596 7-03

JOB FILE .- I CAD FILE 47JM004-RevB.dwg

DESIGN R.K 25-6-03

A * DESIGN CHECK A.M. 7-03

DRAWN

DRAFTING CHECK

H.T.

R.K

25-6-03

10-7 -03

--rtiri Tim

Brisbane City

BrisbanC viosos Projects water 01000 Engineering

>PROJECT

LEWORTHY STREET WP22 WATER PUMP STATION SWITCHBOARD UPGRADE

>TITLE

MAIN SWITCHBOARD

BASIC TRANSFER SWITCH SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

>SCALE NTS

A.H. DATUM

° 1 OF 1

DRAWING N°

486/4/7-J M004 A

14

<

E

AMEND.

SHEETS j

15 16

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 146 of 158

0

N

rn

Im

N

E

1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 I 14 I 15 I 16

51

52

53

54

SS

56

51

56

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

10

71

72

73

74

. 75

76

77

78

79

80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

100

- / / / / CONTINUED FROM DRAWING 486/4/7-11002 . - - N R il 13 102

103

F1 - F3 S(NGl 104 , , 200/63A ARRESTORS < 1D - E ;az 1K1-1 An O Irr237 to 105 ta,

101 .1 70 n<1 T 105 106 207 1K3 -1 1K5-1- 2K1-3

1K1 F 106 Ill 13 . 14 1 I 1 VI W 1K6-1 104 0 I= 107 ,__,) : li 0

----"' I

=- 108 CINIMIUM3 OREM 206 REFLUX MICRO

150 ' 61 kV 1K8 109 0_ __1',,,,_ 122

1

' 110 . 1K2 F

13 is 1

111 111) 1H1 F

112 1K4-1 119

11

[]HRNI F

113

(01 F

114 IK8-1 no 1T1 F

RESET - 1K7-1 ALY1 A2 1

- 75 ..1 K3-_,.......2.111___N_, 111

-

116 _IT1 -1 2 a1K 3 F

15 , 1 I NL3 117

WHITE NEUTRAL LINK 32A NI -1 'CED 11R

119 RIO 1K9-1 IA) 1H2 F 103 E/STOP II

03 6A 100 K3-3 200A ------ .----ri----122"r;)

-,.1.e. TERASAKI on 1K2-1 110 (W) 1H3 p

XS40 ONJ 250 ------- 121

. Ir..0.8 11(4

_..._.. ___ _ 01 LI ISS Ti --r"

SOFT -PUMP No. 1 ns 1K4 p jr___,...4, 0L2 STARTER 110 kW

123 21 K1 22 .....,...-- -is

Al 1 A2 1 --e......--....> L3 EMOTRON T3 ... F.L.C. 195 AMPS 124 . - .

31 K3 33 in . 1K5 p

13 14 1, MSF-170

PE PE -- 125 /11 IKI-2 110 12.

69 70 126 I

...--------°' - . . . . . ... / 13

1-T2 52 IV / SOFT STARTER 127

6 I BRIDGE , Ili m' ' EMOTRON 1-T1 ii NSF -170 0 128

129

130 I

,,,.-- GNOG > A-LINE '

RS485-A RS-485 COP

11 B-LINE 131 R548 -B

FROM POWE N PEo i

132 . RS485 -A - : RS-485 COP

TO SLAVE 2 133

134 RTU 24Vdc

CONTINUED FROM 0R4,

135 486/4/7-11004 A i

136 2

137 RTU DIGITAL INPUTS 1K2-2

138 CONTROL CIRCUIT AV > RTU-chin1.8 12 8

diTT11.13 24 20

dim 19 21 21 1K4 -2 139 > RTU-dim1.9( -*---

114 61 RUN/STOP STATUS

22 22 1K8-2 140 >RTU-dim1.10( 6'1'11° REFLUX MICROSWITE

8

./ d1m1 11 23 23 1K5-3 141 > RTU-dim1.1 ks -.0,-- SOFT STARTER TRIP

142 > RTU-dim1.12( dim1.12 II 32 EMERGENCY STOP P1

143 >RTU- dim1.1 dim1.13 n 33 a- LOCAL RESET P/B

Rill DIGITAL OUTPLI 144 2, 24 II 1K6

<RTU-dom1.3> dmi 3 145 a . 6 PUMP 1 - RUN/STOP

107

11.6

doml 4 20 25 1K7 plimP 1- FAULT REST <RTU-dom1.4)-- 141 ,Mb

148

PUMP 1- STATUS IN( (RTU-dom1.0 tk- domI 0 7 34 31. ll 1K9 119 149 a . 0 EWE) / J / / / CONTINUED IN DRAWING 486/4/7-M006 150

LINE .1 1.11- 1)1

CONTINUED ON ORG.

406/4/7-11006

UMP 1 - RUN RELAY 05. 125, 206

UMP 1 - REFLUX MICROSWITCH STATUS RELAY 14. 140.

UMP 1 - CONTROL CIRCUIT AVAILABLE RELAY 21, 137

UMP - RUNNING INDICATOR

UMP 1 - HOURS RUN METER

UMP 1 - STARTER CUBICLE FAN

UMP 1 - REFLUX FAIL TO OPEN DELAY TIMER 16

UMP 1 - REFLUX FAIL TO OPEN RELAY 06 115, 120. 139

UMP 1 - TRIPPED INDICATOR

UMP 1 - STARTER AVAILABLE INDICATOR

UMP 1 - RUN CONTACTOR 12. 138

UN? 1 - SOFT STARTER FAULT AUXILIARY RELAY 6 119, 140

MS LINK METER

MS LINK

AILABLE

STATUS

ED

B

S.

RELAY

T RELAY

ICATOR RELAY

4 6 7

SYMBOLS LEGEND

> ??7-7I777 85010

?7?-?0?7? OUTPUT

L 1/0 ADDRESS

A ANALOG, 0402ITAL

RTUREMOTE TERMINATION UNIT,

. EXTERNAL WANG

FUSED TERMINALS 1 0.1A U11.0. 1

1MARSMALLING (UMEW

O a LW TERMINALS INARSMALLING CUBICLE)

O . TERMINALS

181 FIELD TERMINALS

AS CONSTRUCTED

C 03.08.04 AS CONSTRUCTED B 17-10-03 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION R.K A 8-8-03 ISSUED FOR TENDER HT No DATE AMENDMENT INITIALS i PRODUCTION / NETWORK DELEGATE

DATE

MANAGER ENGINEERING K.LAM

DATE 28-7-03

PRINCIPAL ENGINEER A.MOONEY.

R.P.E.Q. NO. 5596

DATE 7-03

,JOB FILE CAD FILE 47JM005-RevC.dwg i DESIGN

DESIGN CHECK

DRAWN

DRAFTING CHECK

R.K 25-6-03

A.M. 7-03

H.T. 25-6-03

R.K 10-7-03 Brisbane City

Brisbane Projects

Water owEnglneenng.: ___404001041 PROJECT

LEWORTHY STREET WP22 WATER PUMP STATION SWITCHBOARD UPGRADE

DRAWING

PEA! N SWITCHBOARD PUMP 1 - SOFT STARTER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM SCALE

NTS

DRAWING N°

A.H. DATUM

o 1 OF 1 SHEETS j

486/4/7-J M005 AMEND.

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 147 of 158

B

C

E

4-

F

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 I 12 13 I 14 1 15 I 16

51

152 E

153

1S4

155

ISO

158

IS9

ssa

161

52

163

164

165

161

ssa

169

170

al

171

173

174

175

176

m

1711

179

180

181

162

183

184

185

187

tOS

189

190

192

193

194

195

116

191

238

191

200

10 " /- N

V

/ R

/ ki

/ 8

CONTINUED FROM DRAWING 486/4/7-1M005 LINE 10

202

203

201. u.t ....., I- ..,C 0 ,.. S

205 0 Laa -a Cr

2" 2---0 0

202 2K1-1 it2

1 STAR T STOP 210-1 21(5-1

ma 11(1-3

247 21(1 F 20S

207

ZOI

109

I i 208 21(6-I 704

I

13 11

r

.;

F

2

F

F

F

F

2

r 2

F

F

p

2 p

1 1 .../".... .

200 (5S7 22I 21(8

210

211

212

.

- 213

214

26

216

- NL 4 217

WHITE NEUTRAL LINK 32A NI -1

218 CEM

.0_ _1..,.....__

200 a 2K2 IL .11 13

IRIrol, 2H1

2K4-1 209 i1 %Diva

FIRM2

31 ...----. p,

21(8-1 210 211

RESET ------- 21(7 -1 ALT1 NH 21(3-2 in IQ

A2

-I-1-- Lr frri 213 21(3 5/16 13 IA

203 . E/STOP 2" .--.

Q4 6A 200

1--'lL"at

200 2K9-I nt IA1

to 21(2-1

.....''' 2K 3 -3

.2H2

200A TERASAIQ X00N1S4 250 400 g1

_..._......-...-. s-i-o

221

121_,,_,

...---- 25 IWI 2H3

1K4 _._ .. ._..._ _ I

.. .. 2

-

.2

--1--- LI Ti ..

1SS PUMP No. 2

SOFT A 123

.

21 1(1 22 2 21(4

' --f- L2 T2 110 kW

STARTER F.L.C. 195 AMPS 224

........-- -o

31 K3 33 Al M A7_

217 m ZKS .----95...1,.....- 0L3 EMOTRON T3

MSF-170 225 no ------ -c'

21(1-2 219 12 13 ii 14 2

oPE

69 70 226 I

....,''' 13 0 ?

1 -T2 NI SOFT STARTER 227 210 0 1-T1 MI I BRIDGE

228 21(7-2'

.-1'1"211-1-0 EM

11 MSOTRON F-170

,., GNDo > A-LINEo RS485-A

0 -- 221

230 ' 231 75 B-LINEo RS485-13 RS-485 COP

FROM SLAV( PEo

232

L. 233

234 RTU 249111

CONTINUED f11001 ORG. 235 416/4/7-111005

A 236

r

237

238

239

240

241

242

as 243

63A TERASAKI 244 XS125111 63

. 3 .

20 -i 2K2-

1

RTU DIGITAL INPUTS

CONTROL CIRCUIT AV

RUN/STOP STATUS

REFLUX MICROSWITC

SOFT STARTER TRIP

EMERGENCY STOP P

LOCAL RESET P/B

RTU DIGITAL OUTPU

> RTU-dim2.0< dim2.0 26 1221((

dim2.1 2K4-2 > RTU-dim2.1<

if 27

61

dim2 2 AI 21(8-2 / to > RTU-dim2.2 \

5 2K5-3

> RTU-dim2.3< .dim2.3 .: n

21 .2

36 > RTU-dim2 4<

dim2.4 35

dim2.5 36 36 > RTU-dim2.5< -6--

dom1.5 I 30 2K6

PUMP 2 - RUN/STOP 207

PUMP 2- FAULT RES 228

PUMP 2- STATUS It 219

245

TO DISTRIBUTION BOARD

(REFER ORG. 486/4/7-1110021 246

247

<RTU-dom1.5>- In

A'0 0

3 31 2K7 .----31.....1.....---

x1, 4!.....:----

i dom1.6 <RTU domI.6>-

a

li III 11

246

249

250

2K9 (RTU-dom1.08.,k-

dom1.08 n . a e

UMP 2 - RUN RELAY 05, 225, 106

UMP 2 - REFLUX MICROSWITCH STATUS RELAY 14, 240,

UMP 2 - CONTROL CIRCUIT AVAILABLE RELAY 21, 131,

UMP 2 - RUNNING INDICATOR

UMP 2 - HOURS RUN METER

UMP 2 - STARTER CUBICLE FAN

UMP 2 - REFLUX FAIL TO OPEN DELAY TIMER 16

UMP 2 - REFLUX FAIL TO OPEN RELAY 06 215, 220, 239

UMP 2 - TRIPPED INDICATOR

UMP 2 - STARTER AVAILABLE INDICATOR

SYMBOLS LEGEND

> 777-71777 <. MPUT

(777-70777 > OUTPUT

I L VO ADDRESS

(..---- A ANALOG, 005CITAL

RTUREMOTE rutrumAnot4 UNIT.

EXTERNAL WING to, way,

Fusto TERMINALS ( 0.1A U.11.0. 1

NARSHAIIMG C151017

O LINN TERTINALS IMARSHALLING Clean

0 TERMINALS

1113.D TERMINALS

1

AS CONSTRUCTED UMP 2 - RUN CONTACTOR 12. 238 UMP 2 - SOFT STARTER FAULT AUXILIARY RELAY 06 219, 240

MS LINK

AILABLE

STATUS

ED

/8

S

RELAY

ET RELAY

DICATOR RELAY

3 4 7 10 11 12 13

C 03.08.04 AS CC) s-r Ft L.1 C'TE Ci B 17-10-03 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION R.K. A 8-8-03 ISSUED FOR 'TENDER HT No DATE AMENDMENT INITIALS

PRODUCTION /NETWORK DELEGATE .

DATE r%

MANAGER ENGINEERING K LAM

DATE 28-7-03

PRINCIPAL ENGINEER A.MOONEY.

R.P.E.Q. NO. 5596

DATE 7-03

JOB FILE - N

1CAD FILE 47JM006-RevC.dwg

DESIGN

DESIGN CHECK

DRAWN

DRAFTING CHECK

R.K 25-6-03

A.M. 7-03

H.T. 25-6-03

R.K 1D-7-03

A

B

E

F

DrisbBr ane Projects

Water 110%14110 Engineering

-VW iftMgliij PROJECT

LEWORTHY STREET WP22 WATER PUMP STATION SWITCHBOARD UPGRADE

MAIN SWITCH BOARD PUMP 2 - SOFT STARTER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(SCALE NTS

A.H: DATUM N

N° 1 OF 1 SHEETS

DRAWING N°

486/4/7-J M006 AMEND.

C I 14 15 16

J

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 148 of 158

1 I 2 3 1 4 5 I 6 I 7 I 8 T 9 1 10 11 I 12 - I 13 I 14 15. 16

GENERATOR

TERMINAL BOX

MAIN SWITCHBOARD

INCOMERS SECTION INCOMERS

TERMINAL STRIP

MAIN SWITCHBOARD

MARSHALLING SECTION MARSHALLING

TERMINAL STRIP MULTI-PIN SOCKET 601

WILCO WIBM-27 XG-01 601 INCOMERS SECTION --(INTERNAL) 20C E

XG-02 602 PUMP 1 STARTER --(INTERNAL) 16C E 2

XG 03 603 PUMP 2 STARTER 12C E -(1NTERNAL) 3

12C E 604 GFAILED

XG-04 604 4 605 nGFAULT

XG OS 605 5 606 LI

XG-06 606 6 607

OGFUEL

GRUNNING XG-07 607 7

607 XG-07 8

608 v GCONN XG-08 608 9

609 MPFR XG 09 609 10

610 XG-10 610 11

611 ATS-MSI XG-II 611 12

612 XG-I2 612 13

613 ATS-MS2 XG 13 613 14

XG 14 614 614

15 615 GRSTART

XG-15 615 16

XG-16 616 616

17 617 GRSTOP

XG-17 617 18 618

XG-18 618 19

X6-19 SPARE 20 GOPEN

XG-20 SPARE 21 GAUTO

XG-21 SPARE 22 GCBT

XG-22 SPARE 23

XG-23 B 24

XG-24 N 25

XG-25 r- - - - - - 26

27 DISTRIBUTION I

BOARD 28 POWER SOCKET 062

!") 29

WILCO WIBM-532R 4C E

if NB 30

El3 31

O III 32

415V MAIN SWITCH 2 33

34 R

35 REMOTE 400A PANEL DRAIN W RESERVOIR 36

B SET OF 5 LEVEL INDICATOR 37 CLIPSAL 3PL4PDS

N 38

39

40

MAIN SWITCHBOARD FIELD .0 -100% = 4-20mA

41

42

FROM SOFT STARTERS 551 TERMINALS 69, 70

PUMP 1 TERMINAL STRIP

'Ti

SO

51

11T2 52

53

CON 1

2C E

r---- I REFLUX MICRO I

FROM SOFT STARTERS

PUMP

2TI

2 TERMINAL STRIP I REFLUX MICRO I

1 54

55 2C E

D __I

56 SS1 TERMINALS 69, 70 12T2

57

lg 24V DC

IE COM

don3.00

dim3.01

dim3.02

dim3.03

dim3.04

dtm1.06

dim1.07

dom1.10

dom111

dtm115

duri1.02

dom100

&ill 08

dun109

&mt. 10

dim1.11

doM103

dom1.04

dim2.00

dim2.01

dun2.02

dun2.03

dom1.05

dom1.06

dun1.12

dim1.13

dun1.07

dun2.04

dim2.05

dun1.08

aom1.00.-

aom1.00-

RTU -1 ) ZC E

( RTU-2 24C E

( RTU-3 I2C E _/

RIO PANEL

REFER DRG. 486/4/7-1m014

AS CONSTRUCTED D 03.08.04 AS OONS-rFzuc-rac, C 21-1-04 Do Ft. G REF A.CI E C.) R.K. B 17-10-03 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION RK A 8-8-03 ISSUED FOR TENDER HT

No DATE AMENDMENT INITIALS i PRODUCTION / NETWORK DELEGATE

S. DATE

MANAGER ENGINEERING K LAM

DATE 28-7-03

PRINCIPAL ENGINEER A.MOONEY.

R.P.E.Q. NO. 5596

DATE 7-03

,JOB FILE - I CAD FILE 47JM007-RevD.dwg

DESIGN

DESIGN CHECK

DRAWN

DRAFTING CHECK

R.K. 2-7-03

7-03

H.T. 2-7-03

R.K. 10-7-03

Brio.,640 Frojects - Watew Engineering

Brisbane cit

PROJECT

LEWORTHY STREET WP22 WATER PUMP STATION SWITCHBOARD UPGRADE

TITLE

MAIN SWITCHBOARD

TERMINATION DIAGRAM

SCALE NTS

A.H. DATUM

° 1

DRAWING N°

OF 1 SHEETS

AMEND.

486/4/7-J M007 D

1 I 2 I 3 5 6 I 7 I 8 9 I 10 1 11 I 12 I 13 1 14 I 15 I 16

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 149 of 158

-

is

0

ce

12

w

7

CONSTRUCTION NOTES

FAULT LEVEL 25kA for 1 second

DEGREE of PROTECTION _IP42 DEGREE of SEGREGATION FORM 3h

MAIN BUSBAR RATING _400A @

30C RISE ABOVE 40C AMBIENT

CASE & GEAR PANELS_ 2.0mm ZINC ANNEALSHEET STEEL .

COVERS & DOORS _ 1.6mm ZINC ANNEALSHEET STEEL .

PLINTH SO ANGLE IRON FRAME WITH 1.6 mm S/S TEEL COVER ON FRONT.

DOORS FITTED WITH 2 CHROME PLATED PINTLE HINGES 8 COIN TYPE 1/4 TURN LOCKS. 105' 00OR STAYS 8 EARTH STRAPS. LIFT OFF COVERS FITTED WITH TWO LIFTING HANDLES & FOUR 1/4 TURN LOCKS.

COVER OVER ENERGEX PANEL FITTED WITH SEALABLE 1/4 TURN LOCKS

EXTERIOR FINISH:- POWDER COATED OULUX ORANGE I X15 I

INTERIOR FINISH:- POWDER COATED OULUX BRIGHT WHITE ( 32166 I BCC

DOOR & ESCUTCHEON EARTHS LABELS ARE ENGRAVED TRAFFOLYTE, M3 S/S SCREW AFFIXED.

STANDARD SPECIFICATION ( PSE-SS001 I APPLIES.

FOR SCHEMATIC & WIRING DIAGRAMS SEE DRAWINGS Nos 486/4/7-1M002 to 486/4/7-1M007.

CONTROL WIRING IS A MINIMUM V90 FLEX. NUMBERED USING 3 *GRAPHOPLAST' S12000 SYSTEM, CABLES ARE TERMINATED USING CRIMP LUGS COMPATIBLE WITH THE

EQUIPMENT.

COLOUR CODING WILL GENERALLY BE AS FOLLOWS:- 2.5sqmm Wird Red, White, Blue PHASE WIRING

1.5scirom Red, Blue, Black POTENTIAL METERING

2.5sqmm _Red, White. Blue, Grey CURRENT METERING 1.5sqmm White 240Vac CONTROL

1.5sqmm _Black 240Vac NEUTRAL 0.5sqmm _Orange 24V ELV POSITIVE 0.5sqmm Violet 24V ELV NEGATIVE 0.5sqmm _ Grey 24V RTU I/O POSITIVE 0.5sqmm Grey 24V RTU I/O NEGATIVE

2.5sqmm Green /Yellow EARTH 4.0sciihm _Green/Yellciw

0 BUSBAR ZONE

0 0

0 0 BUSBAR ZONE

0 0

0 - 0 BUSBAR ZONE

0

BASIC TRANSFER SWITCH CONTROL

MODE

Ei 000e Er

OUTLET

FILTER

SK3326200

OUTLET

FILTER

SK3326200

Efi

KEYPAD- 0 0 ®0 0 0 0 0

KEYPAD F-1 ® ® eo H 0 0 0 0

PUMP No. 2 0 0

t.., . . NJ

-I CO

LAJ

.2 L-i

0 0

0 0

ENERGEX CTs

(SEALABLE LIFT OFF

COVER)

®

PUMP No. 1

INLET

FAN 8 FILTER

SK3326100

INLET

FAN 8

FILTER

SK3326100

MARSHALLING

CUBICLE CABLE ZONE DISTRIBUTION

BOARD

MAIN ENERGEX ISOLATOR

Ot PADLOCKABLE OR

LOCKABLE TO ENERGEX

REQUIREMENT

® 0

0 0

1111.04 AS ONSTRIATIO

-10-01 ISSISFORONSIROCICK

A 1443 SSEORN 031111

NO DATE memoir

A

FRONT VIEW

PRINCIPAL ENGINEO3 &MOONEY.

R.PLO. NO. 5095 1-01

DATE

NANACER ENGINEERING IL LAN 29-743

DATE

eE

NI PROOUCDON / NETWORK muam INITIALS

1/4 TURN

COIN LOCKS

0. 411

MAX. 2100

NOTES

1. DIMENSIONS ARE NOMINAL.

900 600 600

i

r . I-

1 BASIC TRANSFER SWITCH

VFD VFO

4 4,14 r-

.5 LA ....

CC

3

LA

,S

1 0 PI VI

CONTACTOR CONTACTOR

I

.t

L.._1 1K4 . 2K4

I

40 x 60 r -4 PUMP No. 1 PUMP No. 2

FUSES

16 III ,E, u 40 x 60

o . o ...,

40 .x 60

z o " .. -- co

CONTROL 8 CONTROL & o

'II fr'

I i

TERMINALS TERMINALS .6,,,.. .,15._,.

IR IR

_Er, nnn uu LI

40 x 60 40 x 60 im,

n LINKS

CTs

r 7 I

ENERGEX 100 x 80 . - _ _ _

- - - - ----_- - - -------------

-CABLE ZONE: _- _ _ ...

------------- ----------- - - ..-

a I

DISTRIBUTION

BOARD

10 I

18 POLE

-I - CI

cl ... I- _.

.

1- ,_, D 0 0

0 I--

_... ul

x

4r)

z -±- c. i...

_CHASSIS_

.--

CHASSIS

GP O - S T R OMB ERG ISOLATOR

OETL400 DI _-

II !

- 0 a 1,

--'

200 700 450 300 450

MEN LINK

FRONT VIEW (OUTER DOORS REMOVED

10

GPO

(Z)

30 SPO

500

VFD

CONTACTOR

DISTRIBUTION

BOARD

GPO

1

SECTION A

AS CONSTRUCTED NOME DATE JOB FIE

Brisbane Dater '"=

PROJECT

LEWOR THY STREET WP22 WATER PUMP STATION

DESIGN NK. 244-03 ATM FILE 4704001144.0 thog

DRAWN KT. 244-03 SURVEY No. FELD BOOK

CHECKED AK. 22-5-03 Brisbane My SURVEYED AN DAMN WIN

TITLE

SWITCHBOARD GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

SCALE 1:10 Oil SHEETS

DRAWING fr

486 4 7-JM008 AMEND.

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 150 of 158

a.

0

et

at

PADLOCKABLE

SWING HANDLE

NOTE 4 .

600

FRONT VIEW

Ar"-

/ 0 0 0 R B E

'P., 0

(-) s" -

Cl

AL.

FRONT ELEVATION

400

WILCO SOCKET WIBM-27

WILCO SOCKET WIBM-532R

L_

400

440

560

DETAIL 2

CABLE ENTRY PLATE

EQPT MTG PLATE

4@80=320

42

5

62

CO

06

DETAIL 1

SOCKET PANEL - 2mm SM (PART OF EQPT MTG PL)

400

SEE DETAIL 2

560x360x3 GL PL

ON 520x320 CUTOUT

IN BASE OF CABINET

CABLE GLAND LOCATIONS

CHROMED BARREL BOLTS

FULL LENGTH S/S HINGE

SECTION A-A

NOTES

GEN CABLES WITH PLUGS

1P20 COVER

440x160x3 FLAP ON 400x120 CUTOUT

HINGED FULL LENGTH WITH S/S PIANO HINGE

& CLOSED WITH 2 SLIDE BOLTS FROM INSIDE

GEN CABLES W/O.PLUGS

GENSET CABLES

Fr,

A 4

24V 2A PLG/SKT

1111110111111111111111111N111111111111 rmssisrEsismvskuumr.vmommus...01Aus 11111111111111111111111111111

177

DOTTED LINES

= ALTERNATIVE CONNECTIONS

TO GENSET

WITHOUT PLG/SKT

FULL LENGTH S/S PIANO HINGE

1. ENCLOSURE = B&R 21214/S OR EQUAL 1.6mm s/s IP66 C/W PADLOCKABLE SWING HANDLE L INTERNAL EQUIPMENT PLATE & MTG. KIT & MEB/S WALL MTG EIKTS.

2. BASE OF CUBICLE TO BE CUTOUT 520x320 FOR 560x360x3mm ALUMINUM CABLE ENTRY PLATE.

3. FLAP ON CABLE ENTRY PLATE TO BE 1.6mmS/S HINGED

ALONG LONG EDGE AND HELD CLOSED WITH 2 CHROME PLATED BARREL BOLTS.

4. DOOR FITTED WITH SINGLE LATCHING 'SELECTRIX' TYPE 1107 -PSCO1 PADLOCKABLE HANDLE.

TO MAIN SWITCHBOARD

AS CONSTRUCTED

C .08.04AS CONSTRUCTED B -10-03ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION R.K A

N' 8-8-03 Date

ISSUED FOR TENDER HT Revision Initlah

Principal Date Engineer A.MOONEY. 5596 7-03

Manager Date Engineering K. LAM 28-7-03

Production/Network Date Delegate

Name Date

Design R.K 2-7-03

Drawn H.T. 2-7-03

Checked R.K. 22-7-03 Brbbane City

Job File

Filename 47,10109-RevCekg Sheet Sire

Sunray No. Field Book

Surveyed A.H. DATUM

Brisbane Projects Engheeriv g

Project -

LEWORTHY STREET WP22 WATER PUMP STATION

Title

GENERATOR CONNECTION BOX GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

Scale Pr Shares

Urainig3N6/417 M009 Rev

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 151 of 158

2 4 6 10 11 12 ' 13 14 15 16

O 111

ENERGEX

METERING

PANEL

PROPOSED

ANTENNA

LEWORTHY STREET PUMP STATION

BRICK WALL

GATE ENERGEX

TRANSFORMER

RTU CONTROL PANEL

425

EXISTING

TELECOM

SOCKET

_ _L_

PROVISION FOR

FUTURE VSOs

EXISTING CABLE

TRENCH

c

2 VII -

cc

0

C t- o

<NI

OVERHEAD CRANE

NEW CABLE TRENCH

100

320 790

380 310 580

BRICK WALL

VERTICAL CABLE

LADDER

141

0

EXISTING CABLE TRENCH

SAFETY RAIL

/-SAFETY CHAIN

LADDER TO

rPUMP FLOOR

REFLUX VALVES

PUMP &

MOTOR

UNIT

141

0

EQUIPMENT

REMOVAL

DOORS

0 O LI1

GENERATOR

CONNECTION BOX

21800

MAIN

ACCESS

DOOR

FLOW

TRANSMITTER

SITE ENTRY KEYPAD

SUCTION & DELIVERY

PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS

7300

PUMP STATION PLAN

NOTES

1. THIS DRAWING SHOULD BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE FOLLOWING DRAWINGS: 486/4/7-JM001 TO 486/4/7-M012.

2. THIS DRAWING SUPERSEDES DRAWING NUMBER

486/6/80-JM1T132E.

AS CONSTRUCTED

C

B

A

No DATE

03.08.04 AS 1 UCT a ID 17-10-03 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 8-8-03 ISSUED FOR TENDER

AMENDMENT

R.K.

HT INITIALS i

PRODUCTION / NETWORK DELEGATE

DATE

MANAGER ENGINEERING K. LAM

DATE 28-7-03

PRINCIPAL ENGINEER A.MOONEY.

R.P.E.Q. NO. 5596

DATE 7-03

JOB FILE - CAD FILE 47JM010-RevC.dwg 1 DESIGN R.K. 10-7-03

DESIGN CHECK

DRAWN

A.M. 22-7-03

H.T. 10-7-03 .

DRAFTING CHECK R.K. 22 -7 -03 Brisbane City

tines _ Brisbane

Water --41"11010111%111"1111

A

B

C

F

PROJECT

LEWORTHY STREET WP22 WATER PUMP STATION SWITCHBOARD UPGRADE

>TITLE PUMP STATION GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

SCALE NTS

A.H. DATUM

N° OF SHEETS j DRAWING N°

486/4/7-JM010 A

AMEND.

C 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 152 of 158

0 0

0

65

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

LEGEND

CONDUITS

PVC DUCTING

LLI

ALARM LICAIT

150

X02

ATTENTION IF ALARM ACTIVE

CONTACT CONTROL ROOM

1000

LOCATION

OFRTU0 MARSHALLING BOX

DRG Nos. 1006 - 0327

GPO

400

RADIO COMMS. CONDUIT

TO AERIAL ON ROOF

r

A

0 0

0 0

0 0 0 0 0

INCOMING CABLE ENTRY POINT

THROUGH WALL

MDF

INCOMING

TELECOM CABLE

PUMP STATION

SECTION SC AL E :N T S

TELECOM

SOCKETS

& DUCT

FOR EXISTING

& NEW RTUs.

HANDRAIL

PUMP FLOOR

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

NOTES

1. THIS DRAWING SHOULD BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE

FOLLOWING DRAWINGS: 486/4/7-JM001 TO 486/4/7-JM012.

2. THIS DRAWING SUPERSEDES DRAWING NUMBER

486/6/80-1MIT133E.

AS CONSTRUCTED

C 03.08.04 AS CONSTRUCTED B 17-10-03 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION R.K. A 8-8-03 ISSUED FOR TENDER HT No DATE AMENDMENT INITIALS

PRODUCTION /NETWORK DATE DELEGATE

MANAGER DATE ENGINEERING K. LAM 28-7-03

PRINCIPAL R.P.E.Q. NO. DATE ENGINEER A.MOONEY. 5596 7-03

JOB FILE - CAD FILE 47JM011-RevC.dwg

DESIGN R.K 10-7-03

DESIGN CHECK A.M. 7-03

DRAWN

DRAFTING CHECK

H.T.

R.K

10-7-03

10-7-03

"7II h

Blisbarle City

--,...--._..'"-.,--...._. "...-0---..^...-.. ..**.-'°...0.10 Projects -: Bn'sbane 0.m,

.00111%m0 Engineering Waterilitionouri 114111110%111

PROJECT

LEWORTHY STREET WP22 WATER PUMP STATION SWITCHBOARD UPGRADE

TITLE PUMP STATION SECTION eSCALE

NTS AH. DATUM N

N° OF SHEETS

DRAWING N°

486/4/7-JM011 ,..

AMEND.

C . 14 15 16

E

F

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 153 of 158

kf

65

C

3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

LEGEND

CONDUITS

PVC DUCTING

LEWORTHY STREET PUMPING STATION

25mm CONDUITS COl C66 ONDUITS TO BE

TO SITE ENTRY cos co, LENGTHENED

KEYPAD BESIDE DOOR .......------- ,

AA

v

...

..

...,

,...

/

0

FUTURE VFDs 100 X 50 DUCT

.. ,...

MAIN

SWITCHBOARD

,- -,- -,

-1- 20A 30 SPO

.

RTU CONTROL PANEL

', 1

4

rd

0 15A 10 GPO

2100

2300

2580

SECTION SCALE:NTS

1 2 8 9 10 12 13

NOTES

1. THIS DRAWING SHOULD BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE

FOLLOWING DRAWINGS: 486/4/7-51001 TO 486/4/7-JM012.

2. THIS DRAWING SUPERSEDES DRAWING NUMBER

486/6/80- JM1T133E.

AS CONSTRUCTED

C 03.08.04 AS C Co NI S 1- F2 U GTE ID B 17-10-03 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION R.K. A 8-8-03 ISSUED FOR TENDER HT

,No DATE AMENDMENT INITIALS

PRODUCTION / NETWORK DATE

MANAGER DATE ENGINEERING K LAM 28-7-03

PRINCIPAL R.P.E.Q. NO. DATE ENGINEER A.MOONEY. . 5596 7-03

JOB FILE . - I CAD FILE 47JM012-RevC.dwg

DESIGN R.K 10-7-03

DESIGN CHECK A.M. 7-03 A

DRAWN H.T. 10-7-03 __.... _ rilll

DRAFTING CHECK R.K 10 -7-03 Brisbane City

-...._...--..._..----..------.-- -....--.0--..-...--,..-.. r' e....

'---....-,0,..... EPnrCginieecterisng- Iii.1... 14fater.4.0.441 Ilft".1

PROJECT

LEWORTHY STREET WP22 WATER PUMP STATION SWITCHBOARD UPGRADE

TITLE PUMP STATION SECTION '1E3'

C SCALE

NTS AH. DATUM

N° OF SHEETS

DRAWING N°

486/4/7-J M012 ,..

AMEND.

C , 14 15 16

E

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 154 of 158

DR

AW

ING

RE

GIS

TE

R

Dw

g N

o D

escr

iptio

n R

ev 0

R

ev 1

R

ev 2

R

ev 3

R

ev 4

R

ev 5

07

165-

E-0

01

MA

IN S

WIT

CH

BO

AR

D G

EN

ER

AL

AR

RA

NG

EM

EN

T -

486/

4/7-

JM01

3 D

ec-0

3 D

ec-0

3 07

165-

E-0

02

MA

IN S

WIT

CH

BO

AR

D G

EN

ER

AL

AR

RA

NG

EM

EN

T S

EC

TIO

NS

-

486/

4/7-

JM01

3 D

ec-0

3 D

ec-0

3 D

ec-0

3 07

165-

E-0

03

GE

NE

RA

TO

R C

ON

NE

CT

ION

S B

OX

- 48

6/4/

7-JM

009

Dec

-03

Dec

-03

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 155 of 158

4.-

o

0 a,

33 m m

3333 co c0 a3 c0

3 al m 33333333

m 03 m c0 03 CD a3

3 [0

3 /33

3 m 03 333333333 m .33 c0 cr3 a3 a3 03

,,,..

0 x 1-

o e-

o ,- c0 4.17 CO 417 ma aD (17 cc) CD cs7 aD CD u, CD CD CD 4.10 CD CO CD 4.0 (0 a7 CD CO

0 N U)

4 00 LO

X 400 u l

ul x

U l

O. 1 - _ r 4 )

O. O. c -c t i , 6

CL -a w

CL 1 = U)

0 I= u)

a 1=

U)

0 to x c4

0. CL

Z5 Z5

0 CL

Zi Z5

0.

V5

CL O.

Z5 6 O.

6 CL CL

1= 1= 05 u)

O. CL = -0 i5 65

a O. 1= 1= co c7)

CL 0 1= 1=

co 0

0 .ca 03 -A

tp

c7)

. o ... c 0 ..:c

0 co

cm C "E

m cc

E 0 , ,,,,

0 >7

a m

u) 15

o z

cq

a Z a E =

EL

- ,- ci z la

E CL

_4 ,t ..._ lc C) NON .a. -1 y 0

.-

,_ cv t- 0 cv (V

- 01 1- a .,-

.0.

cv - ,1,

;' NY 04 ,...

,- y ,-

co u, cs,

01 01 co co) 01 01

cl 01 u) 0) - 01 c,,

CV u) cv

04 u)

,_

CD

03

co ..= m 2 5 0, a M

Mu)m

Ta

E 0 Z

1.)

-X

ED.

co

5 2 5 ,,

14,. a

u) ,-

2 E ,...

cst a ,_- a

cc u_ LL

1:i. uL CL

2

ES co

0 75 cL 5 0-Em`c 0 a) 0 0 m .c CL CL

c') .-

O. ma- 8 - P-

.0 03 0 o

Jo -c Sam § c2 co

.c 0,

-0 -I CO o

0- = m

., a E m 0-

, o .c ._

co -. 1.1 oc

12 0 co .- 0 9, .c `- 0 E

- 0 (a

co

_v 53

0 e

co

5 2

C.) c o

-.. 7 xa

2 5

El

.- CO m2

cq CO

a

6

CC IL. CL

ce 1.1_

a. 2

e (1) .c 0 > b o ..., c n co2x.n

E ..... CO

o , -0 .., c w m

a vi- Ozz.-

o ID

0 n 0. i 2 CL a'

0 1S 7 0 co cc

a a r ..*

0 //)

't .,,,

y

01 a (.6 a s-

0

ci r.-_,

Y m oi 01- co' Y .__.. "- 03 0'- Y Y . .-

- - <0 y ,-

n <0 0 w0) .g

0 zr.

VS c as Ti 0 CI

U)

' P

CO C - E

.c

.§ co " 5 0 0 co

3!,

cm

T?

-e.

-E-

0 0 - 2 o C 0 0

I .6 str .- i co

o .., e- 04 o o aaaaaaoa 0a ..m.

u) o a, m- to 0 co C4 o o

ae C :.:i

15 0 zw

_x c

c If 0

Ln a

0 Ts

t 0 c, c

ci Z .4 03 0

.c v 0

u c

Ca

CD 01 MM 2E 0 CD et 40 Z

Ca

CD 04 Ca CJ 0 2E cr 0 CO 0 04 V CO z

,- m, 04 0) co al cv 01 0) 0)

cm cm 04

aD c0 04 0 0) 04

z 0, 07 cc, a0 1.- 0 CC Z

0 CL 0, 0 0. CD

. .--

04 2 al 01

0.-

ON ...... C3 c) . 't U)

C) 1-

5z 04 ;F 0 0 ., ,- Z 0)

.... " 0 ES

03 ,-, In 0D c0 UD 4D 04 04

00 aD u.) 0 00 03 ma um 04 C4

et el CD C7 c0 c0 In to 04 cv

CV .- C3 C) 03 00 in 0 04 04

0 00 ,- '- -J

C9 CO

00 e- .- Ul LU 0.1 CI 0

01 00 01 01 cO Ca a) 01) 04 04

o E E

U

0 0 ,. ea cl

03

o __-I

0 0 E 0 cc LO

ecI

> N L ° up CV

04

CV gN4

ES .c

cs

.er co

W o < 03 4) + co .../ N

D 4. 4 01

A >-, LL <

4.0 co

o. E 0 a.

" u, CO > < _,I, 444 co x

co

CD 04 Ca

2 (n&

Z

0 0 00 .4. a) 00 in

ad, "co

o o CV 0. ce 7 LL u- 9 (i)

CD op

,- ,..) c)

0...

zss7 N U

LLI 0 ,- < co 03 z c)

"0,-

Ce

10 c) CD 1

6 tCcA

01

6 Nal

NN 04 04 04 cv e- CD ..* ..m cm, cu .- ..- 04 e- 04 ,- 01 01 01 04 e- 01 0, .. , .... ., ',. ,,. ,,. ,, 1.... 1.... '... 1... ,1.. .,. A.. ,I. 1.... 11. S". C4

0 -V ea 2

CCcCCCC C 0 L9 csccccc o 2

-C 'a 0 0 CD C9

0 o 2 2E

'a "c 0 0 C9 L9

o as

2 2

C -a 0 0 CD CD

o 011.1U.I2 2E 2E

U 0E0 C2 CD

C ° a LsEocc ca2=

C) 07

C 2 a

oi: 0 C)

C C 0 C 0 04 00 iE 00

2E 2E

CCCCCCCC "C C CD CD

CD L9

Gcc.G.G..c..c5. 'a iE 0 0 2222222200(7)22MM

'a 'a 0 0 CD C9

iE i: a) 0

'a 'c 0 0 C9 CD

i: 'a 0 0

"a C 0 0 CD L9

iE i: 0 a)

2 e 0 ca

cCCC 'a CD

(22 Tsccsc a iE .- el

*a "a 0 0 CD 1-9

iE 'c 0 0

-c 0 LD

i5 0

z _. .."' SC

0 7 13.

E 8 c:. - E

E 0 7 717-

11 I--

0 7 a -E 8 aa

E 0 0 I--

C oc

Oa ' cccE- 'E 000(DEE007740CD 2E

c c -c -c

04 ' 0°

'c :E.

2E 2E

. n .- cr

c al 8

0 0

I-- Lu

.cc 8 0W ....cE.-EEE 0 'E

Lu 2

. 7 Q

al

ID E

--. 11

CD 03 7 7 a- 0' ccc m2 m8

o 0 1- 1-

a

03

as

I--

.. C 0 E 0. 7 cr IJJ

CL I- < c) ? (r) ..

e 'a 0

CL I- < CD . o - a' 0 0 t 15 _le 0 0 2

.,,.a3 0 ac

ac 0 O 1= 0 2 - en i5 E m 12

.c 13 0 c 0 co 2E X

ri5 .- as as 03 0 13 CO 0 O.5

.-1 0 c ... 060 E

Q. E 1.- o < c) aD

0 15 :0 a 22 11 MILL22b i 0 .. . - - 5 5 11. IL

>, co

a CC

E 7 0 - .4-4 ia 0 0 . CD - 3 2 o

CL CL

Ca 1- e C.)

0 CD V 4-. 0 m> 0 0) 3 a

'-- 0 7 CL 07

.c 0

u) .z ,5)

4-

.° .0 0 CO

-1 7:

.c 4.2

.§ (f)

8 "

0 0

o .0 i5 D

O. L. o

>. 0 0 0 cc cc

15

F.t. .-1 L. o 2 rs -

43

E co LI z 2 6 a. tE

CD 000U)C0C0<01-777 ,c

,T3

c ° 0 0 i 2 cl. C"

0 .9 = OBED co or

8 '&) sr

2 2

" 0 ti - c o 0 co as

:i 00

tr) _v 0

112 ,,- co SC ..

w 3 2

-0 (..)

CL co

co

, 0 - >, a' MO ,.. 0 .1.1 c - 0 CC

3,17 T3 CO o 0 03 7: c c 0 D D 1 .2 as II)

0- CL

X3 CO a)

7: c 0 7 2 CO

CL

',13

7c M

E Cr) Cla

_,,e co

E La

co..-Atocococoe .... .-, D CI 2 0 5 oc CL CL 1- (4) < 04 CD 0a ,-

lb. 0c M

E ca _.

as

La P_'

%I !-. Cl 7777.- 0 2 cc t)

CL CL U) 01 < CD CV ,- 01

... as as

E E

!. !..

E E 5 b 0_ 0_ U) Up

CD CD 04 ,-

0 co ,e LI.' 0 !... C° 0 .5 ." ,., c) --

(..) CL a) .-

0 < ,- cD

c :3 - E 0 4-,

a_ D 0 0 2

, c

47.1 0 0 J: 0

a, CO .I: LU 0

ca E co 1.t

1.23

0 - i- 17

V) 0 aD I

.

m 71.

3 CO

lb z E 0 ..,

sr O 8

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 156 of 158

C.

o-

0 CO CO m 03 03 03 03 03 03 CO CO

CO CO OD CO CO CO CO CO ci; II CO (0 (0

1 111 111

0 N CO

1 i i

0 .0

.- I- ,..,

1 .-E .

}- 'C CCI-

0 E, N

< >

CV

N

_.,

0

0 co c --E . 43

cF,2000 Li

.c on

CO

C c (i) t t C3

15 - _No 0 0 -. 0 8 CO co - 2 65

= 0 0_

a) c 0

.,..

7) E

I

0 C 0 0

.52 0 0 - c C

-..- E 0 01-72-C

F- I:, tt C30.c

.L'i IL

M

M NI' -

CO z u., t o =

,x) D y D

0 0 rt 1. To ,- c L.- - -, E c 0 w I.- CLAN - ;

2 I- I-

7 0 cl .- :a. D

D

« I

ta V, m33 U_

c-a (0 ,t ut)

,93,

< E 8 /-

I I

0 LT, 2

0- U_

to to c0 .- 1... 0 6 4.

2 2

M

.F, k

I-

0 0 0

C C3 7. 03 C .. N 0 Ci

03 0_

o u) 0

IZ (1)Mii oi °J,

I-- cIXI ...- CU

CV CV

-: CV

..- .-

CV

C')

..-.

''' E

Eo

5 0 Z

C/ 0- ' t 0_ cl

(NI

Q Ye:17 n2 co

(1;1 CV

' 2 '

co M = 0:1 5 ..7.

S.

o. u)

71; cOPDFO'cOcOc0C0 to CV

" . r ) in CV CV

Cog COI

N00 CV CV

0 CC 4 ) t 0 0 )

CV CV

1.0 C3

CC 4 Z ' CI.C.L.

U- c:, 0 cr -1 0

0 CO

17/ / 1 Lc(

U.) 03 03 N N

CO 0 N / ( 0 1.

,I3 st.) 03 co ni oo)

0) (/- if) (f)

- N.- 9 In < co co c-) on

c) " C V I= 1- Z ..s.

,--

> > cp N cs, CO CO L ° > < > to . 03 It N N

,,,

2 -c 0

CO

x co

To , cE

t-=

8 ri, a) c

6 Z

C

to o Z .- -2

LoMMM n m> 03 rI ,...

-Iv cococo (1)XXX < W , W it)

CO N

« .1)

» < ,/,

o 0 N (C)

Ie.) 0 (..) ca + 0 c) rec, .-

wi cv o) el

.- 1- N- .- .- ..- .- CV .- CV .- v- CD CO C0 CO CC, CV CV - .1- .- I.' N- CV

.- .- CV CO .- el CO C.' CV (D

.4. CO CV G

CV CV CV CV CV CV CV CV

'C'C'C'C'C'C'CCCCCC 0 0000000 .s -(DIVV(7VS-1°---- M

0 e . s . s M M

w a)

5 5

M M

a) w

S 5

M M

0 4) 77777 0' (7

0 :6;14;0 % g 0 03 I- i--

al a)

Cr 0' 5 5

% %

0 CO I- i-

4)

Cr

E 0 co I- CC

N N cC

0 0 W LIJ CD 0

4) 4) 7 7 Cr 0' .a. Z 0 m E E 0 cp

-ci) iii I- --

E 0 in 0 00

E o IA m .

.)g 8 0 t o

0 .c Ol 0.055 8 8 == ..- ..-

.)g x c w w 0 0 -C .0 a. CL

.a< .x c c w w 0 0 .0 -C

0_ a.CeXCL C0 03 (.0

i I 1111 0

E

< CZ

6 _m (ci

112

co - -- pp=mm,..B...-03XI i-2

c)o CL 1-- < (.4040(0a<c.) c()

6 6 -Ne -,C co co

2 2 CO 03

_. r..

2 2 - - 0 CL CIL V) (0 < < CO N

6 O -Y .3e co 0 2 2

CO CO .... rt..-

i-2 2 - - 0 0 Cl- CL (.0 C0 < < 1- .-

, a,- w _Ne

co

2 2.2.

,- 03 CO ,-, m , 2 - -0 0

a. a- I-- (0 < CO c0

,-- 0 >..

Ws 71,- .... .... c u.- 0-...,mDm 0 .- ...=, 0 c c0m==n0=mD-0-0

.-71 0

>, -o mi co o 4)

c o o = v -0 .0 ,c ..0 co co

0- Cl.

-o 0 CD

c o ,.0 = i

.0 0 .0 0 co 0 0- U.

< E « 8 oi ..-

I I0,00 co Ca 0 0 0 0

U. LI-

(I) 0 co co -0 '0 = -c es to

.-- m 0 to 0 U. 1.1-

Z Z 01 07 - .- -1 -, " .--

Ca il2 0 - V -C ..g.

ea) -a .0.0 >> 0

-C3

0

0 w .c c c F-11)

-le c.0000 :1-

-5 .5 -. co .§

'C' (4 s- E 0 I- CI

TC; ..... ..xa) 0 -6 0 0 cn co

T2 L- ..... 0 c 0 0-

In 0 To

To .5. ..0 E E a)

0 1-70411 1- -8 = 0 cnow=om LI u..

co 0 0 D. 13 uj

.E)

c c ,....- - E E I- I-

to

V) 0 co

LL

< E « 8

ea s- I I

CO 0) a) 0 0 co

LL U-

.... CC a) E

`E

W

03 CL

15 0. E u) 1- F.. 0 c 0 a) 0 - 00E82'55 cEi5.5i3own OW-C..E-SiZO

Z. ...c-

11 *.:.1

8 8

Li)

Z-to- 2 'Li c 8 m re

..y c c cc :3 1.1-

a, To - ,.. u

..5

Z E

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 157 of 158

111111111111111111 - , m

os

or

4ED

IDED

a

4 1 k

A

RAI

I 4,

t

f

11111111111111111

11111111111111111

so

Leworthy Street Bardon WPS WP22 Main Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS632 Active 29/01/2014 Page 158 of 158